2009 Fox Racing Shox Owner’s Manual
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 1/322
2009 Fox Racing Shox Owner’s Manual
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 2/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Page i
Table of Contents
Welcome to FOX Racing Shox & FOXHelp ........................................... 10
Warnings ......................................................................................................................... 11
Cautions .......................................................................................................................... 11
Notes and Tips.................................................................................................................. 11
Forks............................................................................................................................... 12
Rear Shocks ..................................................................................................................... 14
Consumer Safety .............................................................................................................. 14
Product Registration .......................................................................................................... 15
Ins tall ing a 32 mm Fork ...................................................................................... 16
Brakes ......................................................................................................................... 18
Tire Sizes...................................................................................................................... 21
Install ing the 32 mm 15QR Axle System ............................................................. 23
Installation Instructions ..................................................................................................... 23
Criteria for a Successful Installation.................................................................................. 23
15QR Axle Lever Cam Tension Adjustment ........................................................................... 28
Items To Inspect Before Every Ride ..................................................................................... 30
32 FLOAT RLC...................................................................................................... 32
Installing Your Fork ........................................................................................................... 33
Before You Ride ................................................................................................................ 33
Setting Sag ...................................................................................................................... 33
Adjusting Rebound ............................................................................................................ 35
Locking Out the Fork ......................................................................................................... 36
Adjusting Lockout Force ..................................................................................................... 36
Adjusting Low-Speed Compression ...................................................................................... 37
Changing Travel................................................................................................................ 38
32 FLOAT RL ........................................................................................................ 41
Installing Your Fork ........................................................................................................... 42
Before You Ride ................................................................................................................ 42
Setting Sag ...................................................................................................................... 42
Adjusting Rebound ............................................................................................................ 44
Locking Out the Fork ......................................................................................................... 45
Changing Travel................................................................................................................ 45
32 FLOAT R (fork) ............................................................................................... 49
Installing Your Fork ........................................................................................................... 50
Before You Ride ................................................................................................................ 50
Setting Sag ...................................................................................................................... 50
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 3/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Page ii
Adjusting Rebound ............................................................................................................ 52
Changing Travel................................................................................................................ 53
F29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC, F29 80 RLC ............................................................... 56
Installing Your Fork ........................................................................................................... 57
Before You Ride ................................................................................................................ 57
Setting Sag ...................................................................................................................... 57
Adjusting Rebound ............................................................................................................ 59
Locking Out the Fork ......................................................................................................... 60
Adjusting Lockout Force ..................................................................................................... 61
Adjusting Low-Speed Compression ...................................................................................... 61
32 F120 RLC, F100RLC, F80RLC ........................................................................... 63
Installing Your Fork ........................................................................................................... 64
Before You Ride ................................................................................................................ 64
Setting Sag ...................................................................................................................... 64
Adjusting Rebound ............................................................................................................ 66
Locking Out the Fork ......................................................................................................... 67
Adjusting Lockout Force ..................................................................................................... 67
Adjusting Low-Speed Compression ...................................................................................... 68
32 F120 RL , F100RL , F80RL ................................................................................. 70
Installing Your Fork ........................................................................................................... 71
Before You Ride ................................................................................................................ 71
Setting Sag ...................................................................................................................... 71
Adjusting Rebound ............................................................................................................ 73
Locking Out the Fork ......................................................................................................... 74
32 F-RL Remote ................................................................................................... 75
Installing Your Fork ........................................................................................................... 76
Before You Ride ................................................................................................................ 76
Setting Sag ...................................................................................................................... 76
Adjusting Rebound ............................................................................................................ 78
Changing Travel................................................................................................................ 79
32 Remote RL Fork Setup Guide .......................................................................... 82
Installing Your Fork ........................................................................................................... 83
Install and Orient the Shimano Actuation Lever ..................................................................... 83
Test the Proper Functioning of the Remote Lockout................................................................ 87
32 F120 R, F100R, F80R ...................................................................................... 88
Installing Your Fork ........................................................................................................... 89
Before You Ride ................................................................................................................ 89
Setting Sag ...................................................................................................................... 89
Adjusting Rebound ............................................................................................................ 91
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 4/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Page iii
32 TALAS RLC ...................................................................................................... 93
Installing Your Fork ........................................................................................................... 94
Before You Ride ................................................................................................................ 94
Setting Sag ...................................................................................................................... 94
Adjusting Rebound ............................................................................................................ 96
Locking Out the Fork ......................................................................................................... 97Adjusting Lockout Force ..................................................................................................... 97
Adjusting Low-Speed Compression ...................................................................................... 98
Changing Travel................................................................................................................ 99
32 TALAS RL ...................................................................................................... 100
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 101
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 101
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 101
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 103
Locking Out the Fork ....................................................................................................... 104
Changing Travel.............................................................................................................. 105
32 TALAS R........................................................................................................ 106
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 107
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 107
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 107
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 109
Changing Travel.............................................................................................................. 110
32 Vani lla RLC ................................................................................................... 112
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 113
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 113Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 113
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 115
Locking Out the Fork ....................................................................................................... 116
Adjusting Lockout Force ................................................................................................... 116
Adjusting Low-Speed Compression .................................................................................... 117
Changing the Coil Spring.................................................................................................. 118
32 Vani lla RL ..................................................................................................... 119
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 120
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 120
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 120Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 122
Locking Out the Fork ....................................................................................................... 122
Changing the Coil Spring.................................................................................................. 123
32 Vani ll a R ....................................................................................................... 124
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 5/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Page iv
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 125
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 125
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 125
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 127
Changing the Coil Spring.................................................................................................. 127
Ins tall ing a 36 mm Fork .................................................................................... 129
Using the 36 Quick-Release Lever ..................................................................... 135
36 FLOAT RC2 & R ............................................................................................. 139
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 140
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 140
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 140
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 142
Adjusting High-Speed Compression (RC2 only).................................................................... 143
Adjusting Low-Speed Compression (RC2 only) .................................................................... 144
Hydraulic Bottom-Out System........................................................................................... 144Changing Travel.............................................................................................................. 144
36 TALAS RC2 & R ............................................................................................. 148
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 149
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 149
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 149
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 151
Adjusting High-Speed Compression (RC2 only).................................................................... 152
Adjusting Low-Speed Compression (RC2 only) .................................................................... 153
Hydraulic Bottom-Out System........................................................................................... 154
Changing Travel.............................................................................................................. 154
36 VAN RC2 & R................................................................................................. 155
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 156
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 156
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 156
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 158
Adjusting High-Speed Compression (RC2 only).................................................................... 159
Adjusting Low-Speed Compression (RC2 only) .................................................................... 160
Hydraulic Bottom-Out System........................................................................................... 160
Changing the Coil Spring.................................................................................................. 161
Ins tall ing a 40 mm Fork .................................................................................... 162
Disc Brake Installation ..................................................................................................... 170
40 RC2............................................................................................................... 172
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 173
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 6/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Page v
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 173
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 173
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 175
Adjusting High-Speed Compression (RC2 only).................................................................... 176
Adjusting Low-Speed Compression (RC2 only) .................................................................... 177
Hydraulic Bottom-Out System........................................................................................... 177
Changing the Coil Spring.................................................................................................. 177
Changing Travel.............................................................................................................. 178
Changing Oil................................................................................................................... 180
Dus t Wiper Seal Quick Clean & Lube .................................................................. 183
Oi l Vo lumes - Forks ........................................................................................... 192
DHX Air 5.0........................................................................................................ 197
Installing Your Shock....................................................................................................... 197
General Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 198
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 198Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 198
ProPedal ........................................................................................................................ 199
Bottom-Out Resistance .................................................................................................... 200
Boost Valve .................................................................................................................... 201
DHX Air 4.0........................................................................................................ 202
Installing Your Shock....................................................................................................... 202
General Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 203
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 203
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 203
ProPedal ........................................................................................................................ 204Boost Valve .................................................................................................................... 205
DHX Air 3.0........................................................................................................ 207
Installing Your Shock....................................................................................................... 207
General Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 208
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 208
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 208
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 209
ProPedal ........................................................................................................................ 209
Boost Valve .................................................................................................................... 210
DHX 5.0 ............................................................................................................. 211
Installing Your Shock....................................................................................................... 211
General Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 212
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 212
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 212
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 7/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Page vi
Changing Springs............................................................................................................ 213
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 214
ProPedal ........................................................................................................................ 215
Bottom-Out Resistance .................................................................................................... 215
Boost Valve .................................................................................................................... 216
DHX 4.0 ............................................................................................................. 217
Installing Your Shock....................................................................................................... 217
General Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 218
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 218
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 218
Changing Springs............................................................................................................ 219
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 220
ProPedal ........................................................................................................................ 221
Boost Valve .................................................................................................................... 221
DHX 3.0 ............................................................................................................. 223
Installing Your Shock....................................................................................................... 223
General Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 224
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 224
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 224
Changing Springs............................................................................................................ 225
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 226
ProPedal ........................................................................................................................ 227
Boost Valve .................................................................................................................... 227
VAN R ................................................................................................................ 228
Installing Your Shock....................................................................................................... 228
General Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 229
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 229
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 229
Changing Springs............................................................................................................ 230
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 231
ProPedal ........................................................................................................................ 232
FLOAT RP23....................................................................................................... 233
Installing Your Shock....................................................................................................... 233
General Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 234
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 234
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 234
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 235
ProPedal ........................................................................................................................ 235
FLOAT RP2 ........................................................................................................ 238
Installing Your Shock....................................................................................................... 238
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 8/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Page vii
General Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 239
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 239
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 239
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 240
ProPedal ........................................................................................................................ 240
FLOAT R (rear shock) ........................................................................................ 242
Installing Your Shock....................................................................................................... 242
General Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 243
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 243
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 243
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 244
ProPedal Valving Options.................................................................................................. 245
Measuring Sag ................................................................................................... 246
Reducer Removal .............................................................................................. 247
"Stuck Dow n" Shock Procedure ......................................................................... 248
AVA (A ir Volume Adjuster) ................................................................................ 249
Air Sleeve Maintenance ..................................................................................... 251
OE Custom Products .......................................................................................... 254
Forks ......................................................................................................................... 254
Rear Shocks................................................................................................................ 254
FLOAT RPL/ Triad ............................................................................................... 255
Installing Your Shock....................................................................................................... 255General Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 256
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 256
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 256
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 257
Adjusting Compression .................................................................................................... 258
32 TALAS RLC (OE Edit ion) ................................................................................ 260
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 260
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 261
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 261
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 263Locking Out the Fork ....................................................................................................... 264
Adjusting Lockout Force ................................................................................................... 264
Adjusting Low-Speed Compression .................................................................................... 265
Changing Travel.............................................................................................................. 266
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 9/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Page viii
32 TALAS RL (OE Edit ion) .................................................................................. 268
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 269
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 269
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 269
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 271
Locking Out the Fork ....................................................................................................... 272Adjusting Lockout Force ................................................................................................... 272
Changing Travel.............................................................................................................. 273
32 F90 RLC (OE Edition) ................................................................................... 275
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 276
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 276
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 276
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 278
Locking Out the Fork ....................................................................................................... 279
Adjusting Lockout Force ................................................................................................... 279
Adjusting Low-Speed Compression .................................................................................... 280
32 F90 RL (OE Edition) ..................................................................................... 282
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 283
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 283
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 283
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 285
Locking Out the Fork ....................................................................................................... 286
F29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC & F29 80 RLC (OE Edition) ...................................... 287
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 288
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 288Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 288
Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 290
Locking Out the Fork ....................................................................................................... 291
Adjusting Lockout Force ................................................................................................... 291
Adjusting Low-Speed Compression .................................................................................... 292
Changing Travel.............................................................................................................. 293
F29 100 RL & F29 80 RL (OE Edi tion) ............................................................... 296
Installing Your Fork ......................................................................................................... 297
Before You Ride .............................................................................................................. 297
Setting Sag .................................................................................................................... 297Adjusting Rebound .......................................................................................................... 299
Locking Out the Fork ....................................................................................................... 300
Changing Travel.............................................................................................................. 300
Service Intervals ............................................................................................... 303
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 10/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Page ix
Suspens ion Tun ing Tips ..................................................................................... 305
Bushing Technology & Inspection ..................................................................... 307
Showroom Testing ....................................................................................................... 307
Real World Testing ....................................................................................................... 307
Control Direction ............................................................................................... 308
Seals & Foam Rings ........................................................................................... 309
Dropout Thickness Inspection ........................................................................... 310
Struc tura l Inspection ........................................................................................ 311
Torque Values ................................................................................................... 312
Un it Conversion ................................................................................................. 315
Using the FOX High Pressure Pump ................................................................... 316
Forks............................................................................................................................. 316
Rear Shocks ................................................................................................................... 317
Warranty In formation ....................................................................................... 318
Warranty Policy............................................................................................................... 318
Contact FOX ...................................................................................................... 321
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 11/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Welcome to FOX Racing Shox & FOXHelp Page 10
Welcome to FOX Racing Shox & FOX-Help
Thank you for choosing FOX Racing Shox for your bicycle. By doing so, you have cho-sen the finest suspension product in the world. FOX products are designed, testedand manufactured in Santa Cruz County, California by the best people in the indus-try.
W a r n i n g ! FOX b i cyc le p r oduc ts a r e no t des igned o r m anu fac tu r ed f o r u se on any
m o to r i zed b i cycle , mo to r i zed cyc le o r mo t o r i zed veh i cle , o r f o r use on any veh i -
c l es ca r r y ing m or e than on e ope r a to r / r i de r , such as tandem b i cycles . Any such
use cons t i t u t es m isuse , w h ich may r esu l t i n p r op e r t y dam age , se r i ous i n ju r y o r dea th , and w i l l vo id a l l FOX w a r r an t i es .
FOXHelp—the web browser-based help system and owner’s manual—provides you with in-
depth information to help you set up, use, and maintain your FOX Racing Shox product.Please read the following pages before using FOXHelp:
1. Welcome to FOX Racing Shox!
2. Using FOXHelp
3. Important Safety Information
4. Consumer Safety
5. Product Registration
6. Product Selector
You can also access FOXHelp directly from the FOX Racing Shox website.
Note : The W eb s i te g i ves you access to t he l a tes t se r v i ce he lp i n fo r m a t ion ,
b u t i t r e q u i r es a b r o ad b a n d co n n e ct i o n t o t h e I n t e r n e t .
Please read this manual before setting up, using, maintaining, and servicing your FOX RacingShox product. FOX Racing Shox recommends that you at least read the first six pages of FOX-Help.
FOXHelp v. 2009 Rev B
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 12/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Welcome to FOX Racing Shox & FOXHelp Page 11
WarningsWarnings are highlighted in bold, black italicized text with a red Warning!, as shown below.The information displayed in a warning will aid you with avoiding serious or fatal injury.
W a r n i n g ! W a r n i n g s ar e s h ow n i n t h i s f o r m a t .
CautionsCautions are highlighted in bold, black italicized text with a magenta Caution, as shown below.The information displayed in a caution will aid you with preventing damage to yourself or yourequipment, or both.
Caut ion : Cau t i ons a r e show n in th i s fo r m a t .
Notes and TipsNotes and tips to assist you with various procedures are highlighted in bold, black italicizedtext with a blue Note, as shown below. The information displayed in a note or tip will offeryou suggestions about a procedure that can be done differently, or that can possibly save yousome time—but never in an unsafe manner.
Note : N o t e s an d t i p s a r e sh o w n i n t h i s f o r m a t .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 13/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Welcome to FOX Racing Shox & FOXHelp Page 12
Forks• Verify that the brakes on your bicycle are installed and adjusted properly before riding the
bicycle. Improperly installed or adjusted brakes can cause loss of control and serious orfatal injuries to the rider. Use only disc brakes designed by the manufacturer for use onyour particular FOX product. For example, "V"-style brakes cannot be used on FOX 36 or
FOX 40 forks. Do not route brake cables or housing through the stem.
Note : I MPORTANT: the d i sc b r ake ca l ipe r m oun t i n g bo l t s m us t have 10 - 12
m m o f t h r e a d e n g ag e m e n t w i t h t h e f o r k . Be su r e t h e s e m o u n t i n g b o l t s a r e to r qu e w r ench t i gh t ened to the m anu fac tu r e r ’ s spec if i ca t i on . I n any case, the
d i sc b r ake cal i pe r mou n t i n g bo l t t i gh ten ing t o r que l eve l m us t neve r exceed 90 i n - l b .
• If your fork loses oil, tops out excessively or makes unusual noises, immediately stop rid-ing and contact FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized Service Center for inspection; see “Con-tact FOX” on page 321. Continued use of the fork can cause loss of control and serious orfatal injuries. Some noises such as spring rattle, oil flow and minor clicks are normal, how-ever.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 14/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Welcome to FOX Racing Shox & FOXHelp Page 13
• Use FOX Racing Shox replacement parts only. Using aftermarket parts of another brandwith your FOX product will void its warranty.
W a r n i n g ! Af te r mar ke t r ep lacemen t pa r t s can a l so cause s t r uc tu r a l f a i l u r e r e -
su l t i ng i n l oss o f con t r o l and se r i ous o r fa ta l i n j u r i es .
•
32 mm Forks: If mounting the bicycle in a carrier designed to hold a fork by its dropouts,use caution to not tilt the bicycle to either side. Tilting the bike with the dropouts in thecarrier can cause structural damage to the fork. Ensure that the fork is fastened securelywith the quick-release and that the rear wheel is properly held. If the bicycle ever tilts orfalls from a bicycle carrier, do not ride it until it is examined by a qualified dealer, Author-ized Service Center, or by FOX Racing Shox.
W a r n i n g ! A fo r k l eg o r d r op ou t fa i l u r e can cause l oss o f con t r o l and ser i ous o r
fa ta l i n j u r i es.
• 36 & 40 Forks: If mounting the bicycle in a carrier designed to hold a fork by its dropouts,use caution to not tilt the bicycle to either side. Tilting the bike with the dropouts in thecarrier can cause structural damage to the fork. Ensure that the fork is fastened securely
with the bike carrier’s thru-axle mount, and that the rear wheel is properly held.
• 40: The four axle pinch-bolts must be torqued to specification when mounting to thebike carrier (see cautionary note below).
• 36: Slide axle in through both dropouts and thread the axle until hand tight. Rotateaxle levers to closed position and push until it has clicked in. If the bicycle ever tilts orfalls from a bicycle carrier, do not ride it until it is examined by a qualified dealer, anAuthorized Service Center or FOX Racing Shox. A fork leg or dropout failure can causeloss of control and serious or fatal injuries.
Caut ion : T ig h t e n t h e p i n c h b o l t s an d a x l e o n t h e FOX 4 0 t o 1 9 i n / l b . ( 2 1 5 N - c m )w i t h a t o r q u e w r e n ch .
• FOX forks do not include reflectors for on-road use. FOX forks are designed for use in com-petitive off-road riding and racing. Proper reflectors meeting the Consumer Product SafetyCommission’s (CPSC) requirements should be installed if the fork will be used on publicroads.
• Except for the FOX 40, all FOX forks have a crown/steerer/upper tube assembly. Theseparts are pressed together (in the case of the FOX 40, the lower crown and steerer arepressed together) in a one-time, precision press-fit operation. Replacement of any of theseparts requires a completely new assembly. Do not attempt to remove or replace the steer-er or upper tubes independently of the crown. Do not attempt to add threads to thethreadless steerers.
W a r n i n g ! M o d if y i n g t h e c r o w n / s t e er e r / u p p e r t u b e a ss em b l y a s de sc r i be d h e r e can cause the r i de r t o l ose con t r o l o f t he b i cyc le r esu l t i ng i n se r i ous o r fa ta l i n - ju r ies .
• The total height of spacers used on a FOX steerer tube should never exceed 30 mm.
• After riding in salt-abundant areas (e.g., ocean, salted roads in winter, etc.), completelyrinse your bicycle off to prevent corrosion.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 15/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Welcome to FOX Racing Shox & FOXHelp Page 14
Rear Shocks• If the shock ever loses oil or makes unusual noises, stop riding and have the shock inspect-
ed by a qualified technician.
W a r n i n g ! A b r oken o r m a l func t i on ing shock can r esu l t i n l oss o f con t r o l and se -
r i o u s in j u r y o r d e a t h .
• Do not modify your bike frame or shock. Use only genuine FOX Racing Shox parts.
W a r n i n g ! Mod i f i ca t i on , imp r ope r se r v i ce o r use o f a f te r mar ke t r ep lacemen t
pa r t s vo ids the w a r r an ty and cou ld cause the shock to m a l func t i on , and can r e -
su l t i n l oss of con t r o l and se r i ous i n ju r y o r dea th .
• Follow schedule maintenance recommendations. Shock service should be performed byFOX Racing Shox in the USA or an Authorized Service Center outside the USA. The excep-tion is air sleeve and mounting hardware service and maintenance, which can be per-formed by the consumer or a dealer.
• FOX Racing Shox contain a nitrogen charge. Do not pry out the white nylon (plastic) plugat the body eyelet end of the shock. The charged portion of the shock should only beopened by a FOX Racing Shox technician.
W a r n i n g ! Open ing a n i t r ogen p r essu r i zed shock can be dange r ous and can r esu l t
i n se r i ous i n ju r y o r dea th .
• On air shocks, the portion of the shock charged with nitrogen does not need to be openedto perform air sleeve service.
• After riding in salt-abundant areas (e.g., ocean, salted roads in winter, etc.), FOX recom-mends completely rinsing off your bicycle to prevent corrosion.
W a r n i n g ! Do no t a t t emp t to pu l l apa r t , open , d i sassemb le o r se r v i ce a shock i f
i t i s c om p r e ss ed o r h a s n o t r e t u r n e d ( w i l l n o t r e t u r n ) t o i t s o r i g i n a l n e u t r a l l en g t h ( n o l oad on the shock ) . Th i s can r esu l t i n se r i ous i n ju r y o r dea th .
Consumer SafetyAs a consumer and supporter of FOX Racing Shox, please be aware of the importance of set-ting up your product correctly to ensure safe and trouble-free performance. It is a good ideato keep your receipts with the owner’s manual booklet, and refer to it for service and warrantyissues. FOX recommends that a qualified technician install your FOX product on your bicycle.To ensure your safety, FOX recommends the following:
• Keep your bicycle and suspension system in optimal working condition:
• Assure bicycle readiness...is your bicycle properly adjusted?
• Check the brakes before riding
• Check your wheels..."quick release" wheels should be securely fastened
• Wear protective clothing, eye protection, and always fasten your helmet before you ride.
• Know and ride within your limits.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 16/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Welcome to FOX Racing Shox & FOXHelp Page 15
• Follow IMBA’s Rules of the Trail. For more information, go to www.imba.com.
• Ride on open trails only
• Leave no trace
• Control your bicycle
• Always yield trail
• Never scare animals
• Plan ahead
Product RegistrationRegistering your FOX product provides you with benefits, which include:
• Important information regarding your product.
• E-mail newsletters regarding the latest events at FOX Racing Shox.
• Other cool benefits that we haven’t yet dreamed of.
You can register your fork online.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 17/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 32 mm Fork Page 16
Installing a 32 mm Fork
Note : Th is ins ta l la t ion p r ocedure a lso app l ies to FOX F29 fo rk s .
FOX Racing Shox highly recommends that a qualified bicycle technician install your FOX forkon your bicycle.
W a r n i n g ! I m p r ope r l y i ns ta l l ed fo r k s a r e dange r ous , and can cause l oss o f con -
t r o l and se r i ous o r fa ta l i n j u r i es .
Read this section in its entirety before beginning the installation process of your FOX fork.
To install a FOX 32 mm fork on your bicycle:
1. Remove the old fork from the bicycle.
2. Remove the crown race from the old fork.
3. Measure the steerer tube length of the old fork. Transfer this measurement to your newFOX fork’s steerer tube. If there is no old fork to measure by, cut the steerer to the properlength with the following procedure:
a Install the new fork on the bicycle using all of the headset parts. Use a crown racesetter to install the crown race firmly against the top of the crown.
b Install the headset spacers (these might not be required) and stem on the steerer,and lightly tighten the stem clamp bolt(s).
c Mark the steerer tube with a scribe at the top edge of the stem.
4. If it is necessary to cut the steerer tube, measure tw ice and cut once! It is recommend-ed that a cutting guide be used when cutting the steerer tube. If the steerer has any nicks
or gouges, the crown/steerer/upper tube assembly must be replaced.
W a r n i n g ! A n i ck o r goug e can cause the s tee r e r to fa i l p r ema t u r e l y , and cause
l oss of con t r o l o f t he b i cyc le and se r i ous o r fa t a l i n j u r i es .
5. Remove the new fork from the bicycle and cut the steerer tube ~4-10 mm below thescribed mark. This ~4-10 mm of clearance allows room for the stem cap to lightly tensionthe headset, to eliminate any free play. Refer to your stem manufacturer’s instructions tobe sure there will be enough clamping surface for the stem.
6. Use a flat file to de-burr the outer and inner top edges of the newly cut steerer tube.
7. Install the star-fangled nut: with a star-fangled nut installation tool, install the star-fangled nut into the steerer to the proper depth.
Note : The to ta l he igh t o f spacer s used on a FOX s tee r e r tube shou ld neve r ex -
c ee d 3 0 m m .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 18/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 32 mm Fork Page 17
8. Using a crown race setter to install the crown race firmly against the top of the crown.
9. Install all headset parts and stem spacers (if these spacers are required).
10.Torque the star-fangled nut to the stem manufacturer’s specifications, and also torque thestem clamping bolt(s) to specification at this time.
11.The headset should be so well adjusted that it turns freely without drag or free play.
12.Re-install the brakes and adjust the brake pads according to the brake manufacturer’s in-structions.
13. If your fork is a disc brake-only model, route the front disc brake hose through the supplieddisc brake hose guide. The disc brake hose guide is assembled as shown in the drawingsbelow.
14.Tighten the M3 x 12 disc brake hose guide screw with a 2.5 mm-hex key wrench andtorque to 8 in-lb (90 N-cm).
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 19/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 32 mm Fork Page 18
Brakes
Linear-pull
Linear-pull brakes (i.e., V-brakes) can be used on FOX 32 mm forks equipped with brakeposts. Install and adjust linear-pull brakes according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Test
brakes for proper operation on flat land. Since FOX 32 mm forks use a hangerless lower legdesign, cantilever style brakes cannot be used.
Disc
Disc brakes with 160 – 203 mm rotors can be used on FOX 32 mm forks. Do not use rotorslarger than 203 mm. Install disc brakes and torque all fasteners according to manufacturer’sspecifications.
Caut ion : I MPORTANT: the d i sc b r ake ca l i pe r moun t i ng b o l t s m us t have a t l east
1 0 - 1 2 m m o f t h r e a d e n g ag e m e n t w i t h t h e f o r k . Be su r e t h e s e m o u n t i n g b o l t s a r e to r qu e wr ench t i gh tened to t he manu fac tu r e r ’ s speci f i cat i on . I n any case , the
d i sc b r ake ca l ipe r m oun t i ng bo l t t i gh ten ing t o r que l eve l mus t neve r exceed 90
i n - l b .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 20/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 32 mm Fork Page 19
Install, route and check that all cables or hydraulic hoses are securely fastened to the lowerleg and will not move during compression of the fork. It is recommended that new disc brakepads be installed to ensure proper alignment and to minimize drag. Test brakes for properoperation on flat land.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 21/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 32 mm Fork Page 20
Caut ion : To r que ca l ipe r s to b r ake m anu fac tu r e r ’ s speci f i ca t i ons .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 22/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 32 mm Fork Page 21
Mount the front wheel. Check that the quick-release nuts sit in the fork dropout counterbores.The quick-release should engage four (4) or more threads. Close the quick-release with thelever in front of and parallel to the left fork leg.
Tire Sizes
For 26" Wheels
FOX 32 mm forks will accept tire sizes up to 2.40 inches wide (e.g., WTB MotoRaptor 55/60,26 x 2.40). Any tire larger than 26 x 2.30 must be checked for clearance using the followingmethod.
Determining correct tire size
With the tire installed and inflated on the rim, measure the following three dimensions:
• Maximum Peak Tire Diameter = 686 mm = 27.00 inch• Maximum Edge Tire Diameter = 652 mm = 25.67 inch• Maximum Tire Width = 61 mm = 2.40 inch
For 29" Wheels
FOX F29 forks will accept tire sizes up to 2.30 inches wide. Any tire larger than 29 x 2.30 mustbe checked for clearance using the following method.
Determining correct tire size
With the tire installed and in?ated on the rim, measure the following three dimensions:
• Maximum Peak Tire Diameter = 744 mm = 29.29 inch• Maximum Edge Tire Diameter = 713 mm = 28.07 inch• Maximum Tire Width = 58.5 mm = 2.30 inch
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 23/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 32 mm Fork Page 22
W a r n i n g ! D o n o t u s e a t i r e i f a n y m e a su r e m e n t e x ce ed s t h e m a x i m u m d i m e n -
s ions show n above . Using l a r ge r t i r es i s no t r ecomm ended and can cause se r i ous
o r fa ta l i n j u r i es .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 24/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Installing the 32 mm 15QR Axle System Page 23
Installing the 32 mm 15QR AxleSystem
Installation InstructionsBefore beginning the installation procedure, take note of the following points that would indi-cate a successfully installed 15QR Axle System.
Criteria for a Successful Installation
• The point of resistance when the 15QR lever cam starts to engage and tighten mustbe where the lever is parallel to the 15QR axle when closing the 15QR lever by hand;see Figure 4: “15QR Lever Resistance Point” on page 26.
• The 15QR lever must be secured by the use of hand strength only. No hand tools
should ever be used; see Figure 5: “Closing the 15QR Lever” on page 26.
• The side of the lever with the inscription "CLOSED" must be facing outwards from thewheel, and the 15QR lever must be positioned between one (1) and twenty (20) mmforward of the fork leg; see Figure 6: “Correct Orientation of the Closed 15QR Lever” on page 27.
W a r n i n g ! Some mode ls o f FOX fo r ks a r e equ ipped w i th the
15QR ax le sys tem to he lp fac i l it a t e easy i ns ta l l a t i on and r e - m ova l o f t he b i cyc le f r on t w hee l assemb ly . Fa i l u r e to p r ope r l y
i ns ta l l t he 1 5QR ax le and w hee l on to y ou r b i c ycle cou ld cause t h e w h e e l t o b e co m e d e t a c h ed f r o m t h e b i c y cl e w h i l e y o u a r e
r i d i ng , and r esu l t i n se r i ous o r fa ta l bod i l y i n j u r y . Be fo r e us- i ng , ca r e fu l l y r ead the 15QR ins t r uc t i ons i n you r ow ne r ’ s man -
ua l . I f you have any ques t i ons , ask you r dea le r f o r f u r t he r
i ns t r uc t i on and t r a in ing .
Caut ion : U se e x t r a c au t i o n t o k e e p y o u r f i n g e r s aw a y f r o m t h e r o ta t i ng d i sc b r ake r o to r w hen i ns ta l l i ng o r se r v i ci ng the f r on t w hee l . The r o t o r i s sha r p enough t o i n f l i c t seve r e i n ju r y to
you r f i nge r s i f caugh t i n t he open ings o f t he m ov ing r o to r .
Caut ion : The ca li pe r s and r o t o r w i l l become ve r y ho t w hen the b r a k e s ar e n o r m a l l y o p er a t e d . Do n o t t o u c h t h e m w h i l e r i d in g
o r i m m e d i at e l y a f t e r d i s m o u n t i n g f r o m t h e b i c y cl e , o r y o u m a y ge t bu r ned . Ensu r e tha t t h e b r ake com ponen ts have coo led
dow n su f f i c i en t l y , be fo r e a t tem p t ing t o ad jus t o r ser v i ce you r
d isc b rakes .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 25/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Installing the 32 mm 15QR Axle System Page 24
1. Position your front wheel into the dropouts of the lower fork leg. As you are installing thefront wheel, be sure to squarely position the brake rotor in between the brake pads of thedisc caliper. The hub shoulders should seat squarely and firmly in the dropout counter-bores.
Figure 1: Inserting the Wheel into the Fork Dropouts
2. Insert the 15QR axle into the right side of the fork dropout and slide it all the way throughthe hub, until you contact the axle nut on the other side (see Figure 1:“Inserting theWheel into the Fork Dropouts” and Figure 2:“Inserting the 15QR Axle” ). The term "rightside" here means from the perspective of the rider looking at the front of the bicycle.
Figure 2: Inserting the 15QR Axle
3. Thread the 15QR axle into the axle nut five to six (5-6) complete turns, orienting the axlesuch that the open 15QR lever arrives positioned below the fork leg, as shown in the imageon the left in Figure 3: “Tighten and Close the 15QR Lever” on page 25. This step will en-
W a r n i n g ! Di r t and deb r i s can accumu la te be tween the fo r k
ax le open ings ; a lw ays check and c lean t h i s a r ea wh en i ns ta l l - i ng the w hee l . D i r t and deb r i s can compr om ise the secu r i t y o f t he ax le sys tem , po ten t i a l l y l ead ing to se r i ous o r fa ta l bod i l y
i n j u r y . I m p r o p e r h u b a n d a x l e i n st a l l at i o n c a n r e su l t w i t h s e - r i ous o r fa ta l bod i ly i n j u r y .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 26/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Installing the 32 mm 15QR Axle System Page 25
sure that when the 15QR lever is closed, it will be positioned properly forward of the forkleg.
Note : Do no t th r ead the 15QR ax le i n to the ax le nu t beyon d the f i ve to s i x ( 5 -
6 ) com p le te tu r n s , o r i t w i l l beg in to b ind i n to t he 15QR leve r - s ide fo r k d r op -
o u t .
Figure 3: Tighten and Close the 15QR Lever
4. Move the 15QR lever from the open towards closed position, to test whether the cam re-sistance of the 15QR lever starts to be felt when the lever lines up parallel to the 15QRaxle (see Figure 4: “15QR Lever Resistance Point” on page 26). If the resistance point isnot felt where the 15QR lever is parallel to the axle, the axle nut orientation needs to bereadjusted. For the instructions how to do this, see the “15QR Axle Lever Cam TensionAdjustment” section.
W a r n i n g ! I m p r o p e r a dj u s t m e n t o f t h e a x l e n u t c a n l ea d t o s e-
r i ous o r fa ta l bod i l y i n j u r y !
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 27/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Installing the 32 mm 15QR Axle System Page 26
Figure 4: 15QR Lever Resistance Point
5. With hand strength only, push the 15QR lever to the fully closed position with the palmof your hand. Do not use any kind of hand tool to increase leverage; see Figure 5:“Closingthe 15QR Lever” . When closed, the lever must be in the CLOSED orientation, as shown inFigure 6: “Correct Orientation of the Closed 15QR Lever” on page 27. The 15QR levermechanism is an over-center cam system, which is very similar to quick release hub sys-tems common in the bicycle industry.
Figure 5: Closing the 15QR Lever
W a r n i n g ! Neve r use any o t he r too l t o t i gh t en the 15QR leve r
on to t he l ow e r l egs. Ove r - t i gh ten ing t he 15QR leve r can dam-
age the ax le , ax le nu t o r f o r k d r opou t s , po ten t i a l l y l ead ing to sudden fa i l u r e r esu l t i ng w i th se r i ous or fa ta l bod i l y i n j u r y .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 28/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Installing the 32 mm 15QR Axle System Page 27
Figure 6: Correct Orientation of the Closed 15QR Lever
The 15QR lever should be fully pushed in to close, the side of the lever with the engraved in-scription CLOSED must be facing outwards from the wheel, and the lever must be positionedbetween one (1) and twenty (20 ) mm forward of the fork leg, as shown in Figure 6:“CorrectOrientation of the Closed 15QR Lever” .
Caut ion : Pos i t i on ing the c losed 15QR leve r below t he fo r k l eg
d r opou t m ay l eave i t vu lne r ab le to h i t t i ng an ob jec t , posing a
po ten t i a l r i sk o f qu i ck l y l oosen ing t he ax le . I f you pos i t i on th e
c losed 15QR leve r i n f r on t o f t he fo r k l eg , t h i s po ten t i a l hazar d m ay be r educed .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 29/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Installing the 32 mm 15QR Axle System Page 28
15QR Axle Lever Cam Tension Adjustment
If the 15QR lever cam tension is either too loose or too tight when the 15QR lever is posi-tioned between one (1) and twenty (20 ) mm forward of the fork leg when it’s closed (asshown in Figure 6: “Correct Orientation of the Closed 15QR Lever” on page 27), use the fol-lowing procedure to correct this misadjustment.
1. Write down the axle number engraved on the axle nut, which is pointed to by the indi-cator arrow on the fork leg; see Figure 7: “Dropout Indicator Arrow and Axle Number” below.
Figure 7: Dropout Indicator Arrow and Axle Number
2. With a 2.5 mm hex key wrench, loosen the axle nut keeper screw approximately four(4) turns, but do not completely remove the screw; see Figure 8: “Loosening the Axle NutKeeper” on page 29.
W a r n i n g ! I m p r o p e r a dj u s t m e n t o f t h e a x l e n u t c a n l ea d t o s e-
r i ous o r fa ta l bod i l y i n j u r y ! Fo l l ow these i ns t r uc t i ons ve r y
ca r e fu l l y .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 30/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Installing the 32 mm 15QR Axle System Page 29
Figure 8: Loosening the Axle Nut Keeper
3. Move the 15QR lever to the OPEN position and unscrew the 15QR axle approximately four
(4) turns.4. With the 15QR lever in the OPEN position, push the 15QR axle in from the lever side of
the fork. With this action, the axle nut keeper will be pushed out of its splined recess. Ro-tate the nut keeper out of the way, while continuing to push on the 15QR axle (see Figure9: “Adjusting the Axle Nut” below).
Figure 9: Adjusting the Axle Nut
5. Turn the axle nut clockwise to a higher number to increase the 15QR lever cam tensionwhen the 15QR lever is closed, or counter-clockwise to a lower number to decrease the15QR lever cam tension when the 15QR lever is closed.
6. With the axle nut newly adjusted, push it back into the splined fork recess. Double-checkyour changed axle nut number, to ensure your intended 15QR lever tension adjustment.
7. Return the axle nut keeper into place and apply eight (8) in-lb (90 N-cm) of torque to tight-en the axle nut keeper fixing screw.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 31/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Installing the 32 mm 15QR Axle System Page 30
8. To safely secure your front wheel into the fork, repeat the “Installation Instructions” forthe 15QR Axle System until the result shown in Figure 6: “Correct Orientation of the Closed15QR Lever” on page 27 is achieved.
Figure 10: 15QR Axle Lever Warning
Items To Inspect Before Every RideAlways check your front 15QR and rear quick release levers before riding, to verify that youhave installed your wheels correctly and safely. Before every ride, inspect the proper tensionlevel of your 15QR lever by opening and closing the lever by hand. If you are not certain asto whether you have your 15QR lever adjusted and tightened correctly, repeat the 15QR AxleSystem installation instructions.
It is very important to be sure that you have pushed the 15QR lever fully to the CLOSED po-sition. The side of the lever with the inscription CLOSED must be facing outwards from thewheel, and the axle lever must be positioned between one (1) and twenty (20) mm.
Caut ion : A f te r c l osing the 15 QR ax le l ever , do no t a t t em p t t o r e–pos i t i on o r sp in the l eve r , as e i the r o f t hese act i ons can
cause the ax le t o dange r ous l y l oosen .
W a r n i n g ! Neve r a t temp t to i ns ta l l t he 15QR ax le sys tem by
on l y r o t a t i ng t he 15QR leve r to t i gh t en and fasten . Th i s w i l l
no t be su f f i c i en t m eans to sa fe l y a t tach the w hee l , and can r e - su l t i n ser i ous o r fa ta l bod i l y i n j u r y .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 32/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Ow ners Manual Installing the 32 mm 15QR Axle System Page 31
As shown in Figure 4: “15QR Lever Resistance Point” on page 26 and Figure 5: “Closing the15QR Lever” on page 26, the 15QR lever must:
• always be closed by using hand strength only
• always engage tension at the correct resistance point, which is approximately whenit’s positioned parallel with the hub
• never be only rotated to secure the wheel
As you rotate and inspect your wheels, verify that your brake disc rotor, hub or rotor bolts donot interfere with any other component. If you are not familiar with adjusting your disc brakes,see the brake manufacture’s instructions.
Before every ride, lift up the front end of the bicycle to suspend the wheel off the ground togive the top of the tire a few sharp downward blows. The wheel should not be loose at all;wiggle the wheel side-to-side to confirm this.
Figure 11: Testing the Front Wheel
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 33/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RLC Page 32
32 FLOAT RLC
weight 3.74 lbs. / 1.69 kg
travel 5.5 in. / 140 mm
features/ adjustments low-speed compression, lever-actuatedlockout, lockout force adjust, air spring pres-sure, rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use all-mountain, cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 34/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RLC Page 33
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-ther inspection and repair.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the blue aircap (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schradervalve.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve; see “Using the FOXHigh Pressure Pump” on page 316.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting using
the FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 35/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RLC Page 34
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.
Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag again andrepeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 50 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 55 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 75 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 85 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 95 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 105 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM All-MountainPLUSH
100 mm (4") 15 mm (5/8") 25 mm (1")
140 mm (5.5") 21 mm (7/8") 35 mm (1 3/8")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 36/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RLC Page 35
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-
ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNI NG TI PS SETUP TI PS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will pack
down and rideharsh.
If you increaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to slowdown your re-bound
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 37/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RLC Page 36
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing and
sprinting situations, but will sag with the rider’s weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the eventthat a big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
Note : The fo r k m ay cycle a coup le o f t im es af te r enab l i ng l ockou t . Once com -
p le te l ockou t i s ach ieved , the fo r k m ay con t i n ue to m ove 3 - 5 mm . Th i s i s no r -
m a l and does no t a f fec t pe r fo r m ance.
Adjusting Lockout ForceEven when your fork is fully locked out, there are instances when you still want your fork tobe active. To protect your fork’s internal parts, your FOX fork will "blowoff" when it encountersan intense hit. You can adjust when the fork blows off—lockout force—by adjusting the blueknob on the bottom of the right leg.
A convenient tuning feature of the lockout force knob is that it allows you to leave your forkin the locked out position—no more fiddling with fork controls when the trail requires your un-divided attention. Although you might need to adjust the knob a few times to find the sweetspot, once it is found you can simply leave your fork locked out. Your fork will then respondto hits in the trail (greater lockout force), for example, but will be locked out (lower lockoutforce) when you are out of your saddle on a climb.
6
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 38/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RLC Page 37
Turn the knob clockwise to increase lockout force and counterclockwise to decrease lockoutforce.
There are 12 clicks of adjustment. As a starting point, turn the knob all the way clockwise untilit stops, then back off one click counterclockwise.
Adjusting Low -Speed CompressionLow-speed compression damping is adjusted with the blue bezel ring (shown below) below theblue lockout lever, and has 8 clicks of adjustment. Compression damping controls the speedat which the fork compresses. Adjust low-speed compression with lockout disabled (lockoutlever fully counterclockwise). As a starting point, turn the low-speed compression dial all theway counterclockwise (full out) until it stops, then turn clockwise (in) 5 clicks.
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TI PS SETUP TI PS
1
Soft Compression Too soft and yourfork will pack
down and rideharshly.
Maximum wheeltraction and bump
compliance. Too softand you may haveexcessive brake diveand wallowy feel.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 39/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RLC Page 38
Changing TravelTravel on your FLOAT fork can be changed by rearranging the internal travel spacers. Afterchanging travel, check the fork for proper operation before riding. If there is noticeable playin the fork or if it makes strange noises, disassemble the fork and check for complete numberand correct orientation of spacers.
Note : FLOAT fo r ks can be r educed i n t r ave l , bu t t h ey canno t be i nc r eased i n t r a v e l be y o n d 1 4 0 m m .
Tools Required for Travel Change
• 26 mm 6-sided socket
• 10 mm socket
• Small screwdriver
• Torque wrench
• Oil drain pan
• Plastic-faced hammer
• Measuring container w/ cc or mL increments
Supplies Required for Travel Change
5(Factory set-ting)
Average Com-pression
9
Firm Compression Too firm and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
Resists brake diveand keeps the fork
up in the travel. Toofirm and you mayhave poor traction inloose conditions.
Supplies Required
Quantity Part Number Part Name
1 025-03-004-A 1 qt. bottle of FOX Sus-
pension Fluid (7 wt.)
1 025-03-002-A 5 cc Pillow Pack of FOXFLOAT Fluid
2 241-01-002-C Crush washer
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 40/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RLC Page 39
1. Remove the blue air cap from the top of the left fork leg. Let the air out of the fork. Removethe left top cap with a 26 mm socket 6-point socket wrench.
2. Loosen the bottom nut 3-4 turns with a 10 mm wrench. With a plastic mallet, gently tapthe bottom of the shaft to disengage it from the lower leg. Allow oil to drain into a bucket.Remove the bottom nut and crush washer.
3. Compress the fork as much as possible. The air piston will be visible about one inch belowthe top of the upper tube. Push the bottom of the air shaft upwards to push the air pistonout of the top of the upper tube. Use a long, thin shaft screwdriver to push the bottom of the air shaft up through the hole in the bottom of the lower leg.
4. Pull the air-shaft assembly from the fork. Refer to the drawings below and add or removethe appropriate number of 20 mm spacer(s) to achieve the desired travel. Spacers snaponto the air shaft between the negative spring guide and topout plate, as shown in thetravel spacer orientation drawing below.
5. Lubricate the U-cup seal on the air piston with FOX FLOAT Fluid and re-install the air shaft
assembly into the upper tube. Be sure to orient the U-cup seal as shown in the Seal Ori-entation drawing below.
6. Push the shaft until it approaches the bottom hole of the fork. Do not push the shaft allthe way through the bottom hole.
7. Turn the fork upside down. Measure and pour 30 cc of FOX Suspension Fluid through thebottom hole.
8. Push the air shaft assembly up until the shaft comes through the bottom hole. Install thecrush washer and bottom nut. Torque to 50 in-lbs.
9. Turn the fork right side up. Pour 5 cc of FOX FLOAT Fluid on top of the air piston.
10. Lubricate the o-ring on the air topcap with FOX FLOAT Fluid.
11.Re-install the topcap and torque to 165 in-lbs.
12. Pump up the fork to the desired pressure and cycle it several times to check for properoperation.
13.Re-install the blue air cap.
14.You’re done. Go ride.
1 803-00-078 32 mm Cartridge Seal Kit(optional)
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 41/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RLC Page 40
Travel Spacer Orientation
Seal Orientation
Be sure that the lip on the air piston seal is tow ards the top.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 42/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RL Page 41
32 FLOAT RL
weight 3.72 lbs. / 1.68 kg
travel 5.5 in. / 140 mm
features/ adjustments lever-actuated lockout, air spring pressure,rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use all-mountain, cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 43/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RL Page 42
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-ther inspection and repair.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the blue aircap (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schradervalve.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve; see “Using the FOXHigh Pressure Pump” on page 316.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 44/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RL Page 43
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.
Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag again andrepeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 50 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 55 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 75 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 85 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 95 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 105 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM All-MountainPLUSH
100 mm (4") 15 mm (5/8") 25 mm (1")
140 mm (5.5") 21 mm (7/8") 35 mm (1 3/8")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 45/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RL Page 44
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKS OUTFROM FULLIN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS SETUP TIPS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will pack down
and ride harshly.
If you increase yourspring rate or air
pressure, you willneed to slow downyour rebound
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 46/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RL Page 45
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing and
sprinting situations, but will sag with the rider’s weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the eventthat a big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
Changing TravelTravel on your FLOAT fork can be changed by rearranging the internal travel spacers. Afterchanging travel, check the fork for proper operation before riding. If there is noticeable playin the fork or if it makes strange noises, disassemble the fork and check for complete numberand correct orientation of spacers.
Note : FLOAT fo r ks can be r educed i n t r ave l , bu t t h ey canno t be i nc r eased i n
t r a v e l be y o n d 1 4 0 m m .
Tools Required for Travel Change
• 26 mm 6-sided socket
• 10 mm socket
• Small screwdriver
6
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experience poor
traction and wheelhop.
If you decrease yourspring rate or air
pressure, you willneed to speed upyour rebound set-ting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 47/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RL Page 46
• Torque wrench
• Oil drain pan
• Plastic-faced hammer
• Measuring container w/ cc or mL increments
Supplies Required for Travel Change
1. Remove the blue air cap from the top of the left fork leg. Let the air out of the fork. Removethe left top cap with a 26 mm socket 6-point socket wrench.
2. Loosen the bottom nut 3-4 turns with a 10 mm wrench. With a plastic mallet, gently tapthe bottom of the shaft to disengage it from the lower leg. Allow oil to drain into a bucket.Remove the bottom nut and crush washer.
3. Compress the fork as much as possible. The air piston will be visible about one inch below
the top of the upper tube. Push the bottom of the air shaft upwards to push the air pistonout of the top of the upper tube. Use a long, thin shaft screwdriver to push the bottom of the air shaft up through the hole in the bottom of the lower leg.
4. Pull the air-shaft assembly from the fork. Refer to the drawings below and add or removethe appropriate number of 20 mm spacer(s) to achieve the desired travel. Spacers snaponto the air shaft between the negative spring guide and topout plate, as shown in thetravel spacer orientation drawing below.
5. Lubricate the U-cup seal on the air piston with FOX FLOAT Fluid and re-install the air shaftassembly into the upper tube. Be sure to orient the U-cup seal as shown in the Seal Ori-entation drawing below.
6. Push the shaft until it approaches the bottom hole of the fork. Do not push the shaft allthe way through the bottom hole.
7. Turn the fork upside down. Measure and pour 30 cc of FOX Suspension Fluid through thebottom hole.
8. Push the air shaft assembly up until the shaft comes through the bottom hole. Install thecrush washer and bottom nut. Torque to 50 in-lbs.
9. Turn the fork right side up. Pour 5 cc of FOX FLOAT Fluid on top of the air piston.
Supplies Required
Quantity Part Number Part Name
1 025-03-004-A 1 qt. bottle of FOX Sus-pension Fluid (7 wt.)
1 025-03-002-A 5 cc Pillow Pack of FOXFLOAT Fluid
2 241-01-002-C Crush washer
1 803-00-078 32 mm Cartridge Seal Kit(optional)
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 48/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RL Page 47
10. Lubricate the o-ring on the air topcap with FOX FLOAT Fluid.
11.Re-install the topcap and torque to 165 in-lbs.
12. Pump up the fork to the desired pressure and cycle it several times to check for properoperation.
13.Re-install the blue air cap.
14.You’re done. Go ride.
Travel Spacer Orientation
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 49/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT RL Page 48
Seal Orientation
Be sure that the lip on the air piston seal is tow ards the top.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 50/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT R (fork) Page 49
32 FLOAT R (fork)
weight 3.61 lbs. / 1.63 kg
travel 5.5 in. / 140 mm
features/ adjustments air spring pressure, rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use all-mountain, cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 51/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT R (fork) Page 50
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for further in-spection and repair.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the blue aircap (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schradervalve.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve; see “Using the FOXHigh Pressure Pump” on page 316.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 52/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT R (fork) Page 51
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.
Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag again andrepeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 50 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 55 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 75 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 85 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 95 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 105 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM All-MountainPLUSH
100 mm (4") 15 mm (5/8") 25 mm (1")
140 mm (5.5") 21 mm (7/8") 35 mm (1 3/8")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 53/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT R (fork) Page 52
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNI NG TI PS SETUP TI PS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will pack
down and rideharsh.
If you increaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to slowdown your re-bound
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 54/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT R (fork) Page 53
Changing TravelTravel on your FLOAT fork can be changed by rearranging the internal travel spacers. Afterchanging travel, check the fork for proper operation before riding. If there is noticeable playin the fork or if it makes strange noises, disassemble the fork and check for complete numberand correct orientation of spacers.
Note : FLOAT fo r ks can be r educed i n t r ave l , bu t t h ey canno t be i nc r eased i n
t r a v e l be y o n d 1 4 0 m m .
Tools Required for Travel Change
• 26 mm 6-sided socket
• 10 mm socket
• Small screwdriver
• Torque wrench
• Oil drain pan• Plastic-faced hammer
• Measuring container w/ cc or mL increments
Supplies Required for Travel Change
6
(Factorysetting)
Average Rebound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
Supplies Required
Quantity Part Number Part Name
1 025-03-004-A 1 qt. bottle of FOX Sus-
pension Fluid (7 wt.)
1 025-03-002-A 5 cc Pillow Pack of FOXFLOAT Fluid
2 241-01-002-C Crush washer
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 55/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT R (fork) Page 54
1. Remove the blue air cap from the top of the left fork leg. Let the air out of the fork. Removethe left top cap with a 26 mm socket 6-point socket wrench.
2. Loosen the bottom nut 3-4 turns with a 10 mm wrench. With a plastic mallet, gently tapthe bottom of the shaft to disengage it from the lower leg. Allow oil to drain into a bucket.Remove the bottom nut and crush washer.
3. Compress the fork as much as possible. The air piston will be visible about one inch belowthe top of the upper tube. Push the bottom of the air shaft upwards to push the air pistonout of the top of the upper tube. Use a long, thin shaft screwdriver to push the bottom of the air shaft up through the hole in the bottom of the lower leg.
4. Pull the air-shaft assembly from the fork. Refer to the drawings below and add or removethe appropriate number of 20 mm spacer(s) to achieve the desired travel. Spacers snaponto the air shaft between the negative spring guide and topout plate, as shown in thetravel spacer orientation drawing below.
5. Lubricate the U-cup seal on the air piston with FOX FLOAT Fluid and re-install the air shaft
assembly into the upper tube. Be sure to orient the U-cup seal as shown in the Seal Ori-entation drawing below.
6. Push the shaft until it approaches the bottom hole of the fork. Do not push the shaft allthe way through the bottom hole.
7. Turn the fork upside down. Measure and pour 30 cc of FOX Suspension Fluid through thebottom hole.
8. Push the air shaft assembly up until the shaft comes through the bottom hole. Install thecrush washer and bottom nut. Torque to 50 in-lbs.
9. Turn the fork right side up. Pour 5 cc of FOX FLOAT Fluid on top of the air piston.
10. Lubricate the o-ring on the air topcap with FOX FLOAT Fluid.
11.Re-install the topcap and torque to 165 in-lbs.
12. Pump up the fork to the desired pressure and cycle it several times to check for properoperation.
13.Re-install the blue air cap.
14.You’re done. Go ride.
1 803-00-078 32 mm Cartridge Seal Kit(optional)
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 56/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 FLOAT R (fork) Page 55
Travel Spacer Orientation
Seal Orientation
Be sure that the lip on the air piston seal is tow ards the top.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 57/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC, F29 80 RLC Page 56
F29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC, F29 80RLC
weightF120: 3.87 lb / 1.75 kgF100: 3.78 lb / 1.71 kgF80: 3.78 lb / 1.71 kg
travelF120: 4.7 inches / 120 mmF100: 3.9 inches / 100 mmF80: 3.1 inches / 80 mm
features/ adjustments low-speed compression, lever-actuatedlockout, lockout force adjust, air spring pres-sure, rebound, uses 700 cc/29-inch wheels
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 58/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC, F29 80 RLC Page 57
Caut ion : Do no t r em ove t r ave l space r s, o r i nc r ease the t r ave l i n th e F- Se r ies
f o r k s . D am a g e t o t h e f o r k a n d / o r s er i o u s in j u r y m a y r e su l t !
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed on
your bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride
1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exterior
parts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-ther inspection and repair; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturers recommendations.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag . Generally,sag should be set to 15 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the blue aircap (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schradervalve.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve; see “Using the FOXHigh Pressure Pump” on page 316.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 59/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC, F29 80 RLC Page 58
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag again andrepeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 50 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 55 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 75 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 85 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 95 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 105 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM PLUSH
80 mm (3 1/8") 12 mm (1/2") 20 mm (3/4")
100 mm (4") 15 mm (5/8") 25 mm (1")
120 mm (4.7") 18 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1 1/4")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 60/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC, F29 80 RLC Page 59
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 61/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC, F29 80 RLC Page 60
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing and
sprinting situations, but will sag with the riders weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the event thata big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
Note : The fo r k m ay cycle a coup le o f t im es af te r enab l i ng l ockou t . Once com -
p le te l ockou t i s ach ieved , the fo r k m ay con t i n ue to m ove 3 - 5 mm . Th i s i s no r - m a l and does no t a f fec t pe r fo r m ance.
Knob Set-ting(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
Setting De-scription
Tuning Tips Setup Tips
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will packdown and rideharsh.
If you increase yourspring rate or airpressure, you willneed to slow downyour rebound
6
(Factorysetting)
Average Re-
bound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 62/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC, F29 80 RLC Page 61
Adjusting Lockout ForceEven when your fork is fully locked out, there are instances when you still want your fork tobe active. To protect your fork’s internal parts, your FOX fork will "blowoff" when it encountersan intense hit. You can adjust when the fork blows off—lockout force—by adjusting the blueknob on the bottom of the right leg.
A convenient tuning feature of the lockout force knob is that it allows you to leave your forkin the locked out position—no more fiddling with fork controls when the trail requires your un-divided attention. Although you might need to adjust the knob a few times to find the sweetspot, once it is found you can simply leave your fork locked out. Your fork will then respondto hits in the trail (greater lockout force), for example, but will be locked out (lower lockoutforce) when you are out of your saddle on a climb.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase lockout force and counterclockwise to decrease lockoutforce.
There are 12 clicks of adjustment. As a starting point, turn the knob all the way clockwise untilit stops, then back off one click counterclockwise.
Adjusting Low -Speed CompressionLow-speed compression damping is adjusted with the blue bezel ring (shown below) below theblue lockout lever, and has 8 clicks of adjustment. Compression damping controls the speedat which the fork compresses. Adjust low-speed compression with lockout disabled (lockoutlever fully counterclockwise). As a starting point, turn the low-speed compression dial all theway counterclockwise (full out) until it stops, then turn clockwise (in) 5 clicks.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 63/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC, F29 80 RLC Page 62
Knob Set-ting(CLICKSIN FROMFULL OUT)
Setting De-scription
Tuning Tips Setup Tips
1
Soft Compres-sion
Too soft andyour fork willpack down andride harsh.
Maximum wheel trac-tion and bump com-pliance. Too soft andyou maybe have ex-cessive brake diveand wallowy feel.
5(Factorysetting)
Average Com-pression
9
Firm Compres-
sion
Too firm and you
will experiencepoor traction andwheel hop.
Resists brake dive
and keeps the fork upin the travel. Too firmand you may havepoor traction in looseconditions.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 64/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 RLC, F100RLC, F80RLC Page 63
32 F120 RLC, F100RLC, F80RLC
Caut ion : Do no t r em ove t r ave l space r s, o r i nc r ease the t r ave l i n th e F- Se r ies
fo r ks . Damage to t he fo r k o r se r i ous i n ju r y m ay r esu l t !
weightF120: 3.47 lb. / 1.57 kgF100: 3.34 lbs. / 1.51 kgF80: 3.34 lbs. / 1.51 kg
travelF120: 4.7 inches / 120 mmF100: 3.9 inches / 100 mmF80: 3.1 inches / 80 mm
features/ adjustments low-speed compression, lever-actuatedlockout, lockout force adjust, air spring pres-sure, rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 65/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 RLC, F100RLC, F80RLC Page 64
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-ther inspection and repair; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the blue aircap (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schradervalve.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve; see “Using the FOXHigh Pressure Pump” on page 316.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 66/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 RLC, F100RLC, F80RLC Page 65
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.
Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag again andrepeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 50 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 55 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 75 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 85 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 95 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 105 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM PLUSH
80 mm (3 1/8") 12 mm (1/2") 20 mm (3/4")
100 mm (4") 15 mm (5/8") 25 mm (1")
120 mm (4.7") 18 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1 1/4")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 67/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 RLC, F100RLC, F80RLC Page 66
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS SETUP TIP S
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will pack
down and rideharshly.
If you increaseyour spring rate
or air pressure,you will need toslow down your re-bound
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 68/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 RLC, F100RLC, F80RLC Page 67
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing and
sprinting situations, but will sag with the rider’s weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the eventthat a big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
Note : The fo r k m ay cycle a coup le o f t im es af te r enab l i ng l ockou t . Once com -
p le te l ockou t i s ach ieved , the fo r k m ay con t i n ue to m ove 3 - 5 mm . Th i s i s no r - m a l and does no t a f fec t pe r fo r m ance.
Adjusting Lockout ForceEven when your fork is fully locked out, there are instances when you still want your fork tobe active. To protect your fork’s internal parts, your FOX fork will "blowoff" when it encountersan intense hit. You can adjust when the fork blows off—lockout force—by adjusting the blueknob on the bottom of the right leg.
A convenient tuning feature of the lockout force knob is that it allows you to leave your forkin the locked out position—no more fiddling with fork controls when the trail requires your un-divided attention. Although you might need to adjust the knob a few times to find the sweetspot, once it is found you can simply leave your fork locked out. Your fork will then respondto hits in the trail (greater lockout force), for example, but will be locked out (lower lockoutforce) when you are out of your saddle on a climb.
6
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 69/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 RLC, F100RLC, F80RLC Page 68
Turn the knob clockwise to increase lockout force and counterclockwise to decrease lockoutforce.
There are 12 clicks of adjustment. As a starting point, turn the knob all the way clockwise untilit stops, then back off one click counterclockwise.
Adjusting Low -Speed CompressionLow-speed compression damping is adjusted with the blue bezel ring (shown below) below theblue lockout lever, and has 8 clicks of adjustment. Compression damping controls the speedat which the fork compresses. Adjust low-speed compression with lockout disabled (lockoutlever fully counterclockwise). As a starting point, turn the low-speed compression dial all theway counterclockwise (full out) until it stops, then turn clockwise (in) 5 clicks.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 70/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 RLC, F100RLC, F80RLC Page 69
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS SETUP TIPS
1
Soft Compression Too soft and yourfork will packdown and rideharshly.
Maximum wheeltraction and bumpcompliance. Too softand you may haveexcessive brake diveand wallowy feel.
5(Factory set-ting)
Average Com-pression
9
Firm Compression Too firm and you
will experiencepoor traction andwheel hop.
Resists brake dive
and keeps the forkup in the travel. Toofirm and you mayhave poor traction inloose conditions.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 71/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 RL, F100RL, F80RL Page 70
32 F120 RL, F100RL, F80RL
weightF120: 3.42 lbs. / 1.55 kgF100: 3.29 lbs. / 1.49 kgF80: 3.29 lbs. / 1.49 kg
travelF120: 4.7 inches / 120 mmF100: 3.9 inches / 100 mmF80: 3.1 inches / 80 mm
features/ adjustments lever-actuated lockout, air spring pressure,
rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 72/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 RL, F100RL, F80RL Page 71
Caut ion : Do no t r em ove t r ave l space r s, o r i nc r ease the t r ave l i n th e F- Se r ies
fo r ks . Damage to t he fo r k o r se r i ous i n ju r y m ay r esu l t !
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed on
your bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride
1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e washe r to c lean you r fo r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exterior
parts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-ther inspection and repair; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturers recommendations.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the blue aircap (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schradervalve.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve; see “Using the FOX
High Pressure Pump” on page 316.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 73/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 RL, F100RL, F80RL Page 72
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag again andrepeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 50 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 55 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 75 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 85 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 95 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 105 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM PLUSH
80 mm (3 1/8") 12 mm (1/2") 20 mm (3/4")
100 mm (4") 15 mm (5/8") 25 mm (1")
120 mm (4.7") 18 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1 1/4")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 74/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 RL, F100RL, F80RL Page 73
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIP S SETUP TIPS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will pack
down and rideharshly.
If you increaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to slowdown your re-bound
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 75/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 RL, F100RL, F80RL Page 74
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing and
sprinting situations, but will sag with the riders weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the event thata big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
6
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 76/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F-RL Remote Page 75
32 F-RL Remote
weightF120: 3.47 lbs. / 1.57 kgF100: 3.50 lbs. / 1.58 kgF80: 3.50 lbs. / 1.58 kg
travelF120: 4.7 inches / 120 mmF100: 3.9 inches / 100 mmF80: 3.1 inches / 80 mm
features/ adjustments remote (handlebar-actuated) lockout, airspring pressure, rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use all-mountain, cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 77/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F-RL Remote Page 76
Installing Your Fork(See “32 Remote RL Fork Setup Guide” on page 82)
Be sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride
1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-ther inspection and repair; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the blue aircap (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schrader
valve.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve; see “Using the FOXHigh Pressure Pump” on page 316.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 78/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F-RL Remote Page 77
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.
Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag againand repeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 50 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 55 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 75 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 85 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 95 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 105 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM All-MountainPLUSH
100 mm (4") 15 mm (5/8") 25 mm (1")
140 mm (5.5") 21 mm (7/8") 35 mm (1 3/8")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 79/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F-RL Remote Page 78
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNI NG TI PS SETUP TI PS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will pack
down and rideharsh.
If you increaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to slowdown your re-bound
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 80/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F-RL Remote Page 79
Changing TravelTravel on your FLOAT fork can be changed by rearranging the internal travel spacers. Afterchanging travel, check the fork for proper operation before riding. If there is noticeable playin the fork or if it makes strange noises, disassemble the fork and check for complete numberand correct orientation of spacers.
Note : FLOAT fo r ks can be r educed i n t r ave l , bu t t h ey canno t be i nc r eased i n
t r a v e l be y o n d 1 4 0 m m .
Tools Required for Travel Change
• 26 mm 6-sided socket
• 10 mm socket
• Small screwdriver
• Torque wrench
• Oil drain pan• Plastic-faced hammer
• Measuring container w/ cc or mL increments
Supplies Required for Travel Change
6
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
Supplies Required
Quantity Part Number Part Name
1 025-03-004-A 1 qt. bottle of FOX Sus-
pension Fluid (7 wt.)
1 025-03-002-A 5 cc Pillow Pack of FOXFLOAT Fluid
2 241-01-002-C Crush washer
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 81/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F-RL Remote Page 80
1. Remove the blue air cap from the top of the left fork leg. Let the air out of the fork. Removethe left top cap with a 26 mm socket 6-point socket wrench.
2. Loosen the bottom nut 3-4 turns with a 10 mm wrench. With a plastic mallet, gently tapthe bottom of the shaft to disengage it from the lower leg. Allow oil to drain into a bucket.Remove the bottom nut and crush washer.
3. Compress the fork as much as possible. The air piston will be visible about one inch belowthe top of the upper tube. Push the bottom of the air shaft upwards to push the air pistonout of the top of the upper tube. Use a long, thin shaft screwdriver to push the bottom of the air shaft up through the hole in the bottom of the lower leg.
4. Pull the air-shaft assembly from the fork. Refer to the drawings below and add or removethe appropriate number of 20 mm spacer(s) to achieve the desired travel. Spacers snaponto the air shaft between the negative spring guide and topout plate, as shown in thetravel spacer orientation drawing below.
5. Lubricate the U-cup seal on the air piston with FOX FLOAT Fluid and re-install the air shaft
assembly into the upper tube. Be sure to orient the U-cup seal as shown in the Seal Ori-entation drawing below.
6. Push the shaft until it approaches the bottom hole of the fork. Do not push the shaft allthe way through the bottom hole.
7. Turn the fork upside down. Measure and pour 30 cc of FOX Suspension Fluid through thebottom hole.
8. Push the air shaft assembly up until the shaft comes through the bottom hole. Install thecrush washer and bottom nut. Torque to 50 in-lbs.
9. Turn the fork right side up. Pour 5 cc of FOX FLOAT Fluid on top of the air piston.
10. Lubricate the o-ring on the air topcap with FOX FLOAT Fluid.
11.Re-install the topcap and torque to 165 in-lbs.
12. Pump up the fork to the desired pressure and cycle it several times to check for properoperation.
13.Re-install the blue air cap.
14.You’re done. Go ride.
1 803-00-078 32 mm Cartridge Seal Kit(optional)
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 82/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F-RL Remote Page 81
Travel Spacer Orientation
Seal Orientation
Be sure that the lip on the air piston seal is tow ards the top.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 83/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Remote RL Fork Setup Guide Page 82
32 Remote RL Fork Setup Guide
Figure 1: FOX F-RL Remote Fork
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 84/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Remote RL Fork Setup Guide Page 83
Installing Your Fork(See “32 F-RL Remote” on page 75)
1. Remove the fork from all packaging. Be careful not to kink the control cable.
2. See “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 for the instruction procedures for installing a 32
mm fork. Proceed to install the fork steerer into the head tube of the bicycle.
Install and Orient the Shimano Actuation Le-ver
1. With a 3 mm hex key socket, loosen the handlebar clamp bolt on the underside of the Shi-mano Lockout Lever Assembly (LLA).
Figure 2: Location of Handlebar Clamp Bolt
2. Remove the right-hand grip from the handlebar.
3. Slide the Shimano LLA onto the handlebar, in the direction shown in Figure 3: “Positioning
the Shimano LLA” on page 84. The LLA orientation should be so that the release lever isfacing towards the end of the handlebar, and the cable adjusting barrel is pointed towardsthe front of the bike, above the hand brake lever assembly. Re-install the handlebar gripinto its original position.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 85/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Remote RL Fork Setup Guide Page 84
Figure 3: Positioning the Shimano LLA
4. Position the Shimano LLA so that it abuts the inner end of the grip, however be sure thegrip does not interfere with the normal operation of the lockout release lever.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 86/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Remote RL Fork Setup Guide Page 85
Figure 4: Shimano LLA Installed on the Handlebar
5. Push the actuation lever down to its locked-out position, as shown in Figure 5: “Pressing
Down the Actuation Lever” .
Figure 5: Pressing Down the Actuation Lever
6. Rotate the Shimano LLA so the actuation lever in its locked out position does not interferewith normal thumb operation of the rear derailleur shifter; see Figure 6: “Actuation Leverand Thumb Shifter Clearance” on page 86.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 87/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Remote RL Fork Setup Guide Page 86
Figure 6: Actuation Lever and Thumb Shifter Clearance
7. With a 3 mm hex key socket, torque the handlebar clamp bolt to seven (7) in-lb; see Figure2: “Location of Handlebar Clamp Bolt” on page 83.
Caut ion : Fo r ca r bon h and leba r s, i t m ay be necessa r y to s l i gh t l y dec r ease the
t i gh t en ing t o r que , to avo id causing any dam age to th i s t ype o f hand leba r . Consu l t t he b i cycle or hand leba r manu fac tu r e r documen t a t i on r ega r d ing the app r op r ia te
l eve l of t i gh t en ing to r qu e fo r ca r bon hand leba r s .
8. Press the release button to return the Shimano LLA to the unlocked state, as shown in Fig-ure 7: “Shimano LLA Release Lever” .
Figure 7: Shimano LLA Release Lever
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 88/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Remote RL Fork Setup Guide Page 87
Test the Proper Functioning of the RemoteLockout
1. Install the wheel into the fork, per the manufacturer’s assembly instructions.
2. With the Shimano LLA in unlocked position, compress the fork two inches into the travel
and release ten times to ensure the open-bath lockout damper is full of oil.
3. Press the lockout lever down, until you feel it click to engage the lockout position.
4. Push down on the handlebars and release, to check whether the fork is locked out.
5. If the fork is not locked out, rotate the cable adjusting barrel on the Shimano LLA counter-clockwise ¼ turn. Push down on the handlebars to compress the fork, to test the lockoutfunction. Repeat this step as necessary, until optimum lockout is achieved.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 89/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 R, F100R, F80R Page 88
32 F120 R, F100R, F80R
weightF120: 3.37 lbs. / 1.53 kgF100: 3.24 lbs. / 1.47 kgF80: 3.24 lbs. / 1.47 kg
travelF120: 4.7 inches / 120 mmF100: 3.9 inches / 100 mmF80: 3.1 inches / 80 mm
features/ adjustments air spring pressure, rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 90/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 R, F100R, F80R Page 89
Caut ion : Do no t r em ove t r ave l space r s, o r i nc r ease the t r ave l i n th e F- Se r ies
fo r ks . Damage to t he fo r k o r se r i ous i n ju r y m ay r esu l t !
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed on
your bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride
1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exterior
parts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-ther inspection and repair; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturers recommendations.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the blue aircap (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schradervalve.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve; see “Using the FOX
High Pressure Pump” on page 316.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 91/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 R, F100R, F80R Page 90
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag again andrepeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 50 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 55 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 75 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 85 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 95 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 105 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM PLUSH
80 mm (3 1/8") 12 mm (1/2") 20 mm (3/4")
100 mm (4") 15 mm (5/8") 25 mm (1")
120 mm (4.7") 18 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1 1/4")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 92/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 R, F100R, F80R Page 91
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS SETUP TIP S
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will packdown and ride
harsh.
If you increaseyour spring rate orair pressure, you
will need to slowdown your re-bound
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 93/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F120 R, F100R, F80R Page 92
6
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 94/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC Page 93
32 TALAS RLC
weight 3.90 lbs. / 1.76 kg
travel 5.9 in. / 150 mmTALAS 150+130+110 mm
features/ adjustments TALAS travel adjust system, low-speed com-pression, lever-actuated lockout, lockoutforce adjust, air spring pressure, rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use all-mountain, cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 95/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC Page 94
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-ther inspection and repair; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturers recommendations.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the center blue aircap in the middle of the TALAS travel adjusting topcap on topof the left fork leg (shown below), to expose the Schrader valve. Hold the TALAS leversteady with one hand while unscrewing the aircap with the other. This will facilitate remov-
al of the aircap and also protect the TALAS lever from being forced past its stops.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve; see “Using the FOXHigh Pressure Pump” on page 316.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 96/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC Page 95
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag again andrepeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 50 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 55 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 60 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 70 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 80 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 90 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 100 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM All-MountainPLUSH
100 mm (4") 15 mm (1/2") 20 mm (3/4")
120 mm (4.75") 18 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1 1/8")
140 mm (5.5") 21 mm (7/8") 35 mm (1 3/8")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 97/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC Page 96
Note : Sag and sp r i ng r a t e w i l l se l f - ad jus t t o the p r ope r se t t i n g and r a te , as
TALAS i s ad ju s ted t o sho r t e r t r ave l pos i t i ons .
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOBSETTING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNI NG TI PS SETUP TI PS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will packdown and rideharshly.
If you increase yourspring rate or airpressure, you willneed to slow downyour rebound.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 98/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC Page 97
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing and
sprinting situations, but will sag with the riders weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the event thata big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
Note : The fo r k m ay cycle a coup le o f t im es af te r enab l i ng l ockou t . Once com -
p le te l ockou t i s ach ieved , the fo r k m ay con t i n ue to m ove 3 - 5 mm . Th i s i s no r -
m a l and does no t a f fec t pe r fo r m ance.
Adjusting Lockout ForceEven when your fork is fully locked out, there are instances when you still want your fork tobe active. To protect your fork’s internal parts, your FOX fork will "blowoff" when it encountersan intense hit. You can adjust when the fork blows off—lockout force—by adjusting the blueknob on the bottom of the right leg.
A convenient tuning feature of the lockout force knob is that it allows you to leave your fork
in the locked out position—no more fiddling with fork controls when the trail requires your un-divided attention. Although you might need to adjust the knob a few times to find the sweetspot, once it is found you can simply leave your fork locked out. Your fork will then respondto hits in the trail (greater lockout force), for example, but will be locked out (lower lockoutforce) when you are out of your saddle on a climb.
6
(Factorysetting)
Average Rebound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 99/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC Page 98
Turn the knob clockwise to increase lockout force and counterclockwise to decrease lockoutforce.
There are 12 clicks of adjustment. As a starting point, turn the knob all the way clockwise untilit stops, then back off one click counterclockwise.
Adjusting Low -Speed CompressionLow-speed compression damping is adjusted with the blue bezel ring (shown below) below theblue lockout lever, and has 8 clicks of adjustment. Compression damping controls the speedat which the fork compresses. Adjust low-speed compression with lockout disabled (lockoutlever fully counterclockwise). As a starting point, turn the low-speed compression dial all theway counterclockwise (full out) until it stops, then turn clockwise (in) 5 clicks.
KNOBSETTING(CLICKSIN FROMFULL OUT)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS SETUP TIPS
1
Soft Compres-sion
Too soft andyour fork will
pack down andride harshly.
Maximum wheel trac-tion and bump com-
pliance. Too soft andyou may have exces-sive brake dive andwallowy feel.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 100/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC Page 99
Changing Travel32 mm TALAS forks feature three externally adjustable travel choices from 5.5 (140 mm) to4.75" (120 mm) to 4 (100 mm), which are easily selected using the TALAS travel adjustingtopcap on top of the left fork leg, shown below. Travel options and direction settings are print-ed directly on the topcap.
When changing travel, the TALAS system automatically adjusts to provide you with the ap-propriate linear air spring rate for each travel setting. There is no need to change the air pres-sure in the TALAS air chamber after adjusting travel.
For safety reasons, it is recommended that travel adjustment be done while off the bike. If necessary, travel can be adjusted on-the-fly (be careful when using this "extreme" travel ad- justing method), which can be handy right before a grueling climb or steep descent.
5(Factorysetting)
Average Compression
9
Firm Compres-sion
Too firm and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
Resists brake diveand keeps the fork up
in the travel. Too firmand you may havepoor traction in looseconditions.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 101/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RL Page 100
32 TALAS RL
weight 3.84 lbs. / 1.74 kg
travel 5.9 in. / 150 mmTALAS 150+130+110 mm
features/ adjustments TALAS travel adjust system, lever-actuatedlockout, air spring pressure, rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use all-mountain, cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 102/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RL Page 101
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-ther inspection and repair; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the center blue aircap in the middle of the TALAS travel adjusting topcap on topof the left fork leg (shown below), to expose the Schrader valve. Hold the TALAS lever
steady with one hand while unscrewing the aircap with the other. This will facilitate remov-al of the aircap and also protect the TALAS lever from being forced past its stops.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve; see “Using the FOXHigh Pressure Pump” on page 316.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 103/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RL Page 102
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag again andrepeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 50 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 55 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 60 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 70 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 80 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 90 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 100 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
SAG SETUP
Travel XC/ Race FIRM All-MountainPLUSH
100 mm (4") 15 mm (1/2") 20 mm (3/4")
120 mm (4.75") 18 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1 1/8")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 104/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RL Page 103
Note : Sag and sp r i ng r a t e w i l l se l f - ad jus t t o the p r ope r se t t i n g and r a te , as
TALAS i s ad ju s ted t o sho r t e r t r ave l pos i t i ons .
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
140 mm (5.5") 21 mm (7/8") 35 mm (1 3/8")
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 105/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RL Page 104
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing and
sprinting situations, but will sag with the rider’s weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the eventthat a big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
KNOBSETTING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNI NG TI PS SETUP TI PS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will packdown and rideharshly.
If you increase yourspring rate or airpressure, you willneed to slow downyour rebound.
6
(Factorysetting)
Average Re-bound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 106/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RL Page 105
Changing Travel32 mm TALAS forks feature three externally adjustable travel choices from 5.5 (140 mm) to4.75" (120 mm) to 4 (100 mm), which are easily selected using the TALAS travel adjustingtopcap on top of the left fork leg, shown below. Travel options and direction settings are print-ed directly on the lever.
When changing travel, the TALAS system automatically adjusts to provide you with the ap-propriate linear air spring rate for each travel setting. There is no need to change the air pres-sure in the TALAS air chamber after adjusting travel.
For safety reasons, it is recommended that travel adjustment be done while off the bike. If necessary, travel can be adjusted on-the-fly (be careful when using this "extreme" travel ad- justing method), which can be handy right before a grueling climb or steep descent.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 107/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS R Page 106
32 TALAS R
weight 3.79 lbs. / 1.72 kg
travel 5.9 in. / 150 mmTALAS 150+130+110 mm
features/ adjustments TALAS travel adjust system, air spring pres-sure, rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use all-mountain, cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 108/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS R Page 107
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-ther inspection and repair; see “Using the FOX High Pressure Pump” on page 316.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the center blue aircap in the middle of the TALAS travel adjusting topcap on topof the left fork leg (shown below), to expose the Schrader valve. Hold the TALAS lever
steady with one hand while unscrewing the aircap with the other. This will facilitate remov-al of the aircap and also protect the TALAS lever from being forced past its stops.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve; see “Using the FOXHigh Pressure Pump” on page 316.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 109/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS R Page 108
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current air pres-sure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag again andrepeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 50 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 55 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 60 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 70 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 80 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 90 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 100 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM All-MountainPLUSH
100 mm (4") 15 mm (1/2") 20 mm (3/4")
120 mm (4.75") 18 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1 1/8")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 110/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS R Page 109
Note : Sag and sp r i ng r a t e w i l l se l f - ad jus t t o the p r ope r se t t i n g and r a te , as
TALAS i s ad ju s ted t o sho r t e r t r ave l pos i t i ons .
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
140 mm (5.5") 21 mm (7/8") 35 mm (1 3/8")
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 111/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS R Page 110
Changing Travel32 mm TALAS forks feature three externally adjustable travel choices from 5.5 (140 mm) to4.75" (120 mm) to 4 (100 mm), which are easily selected using the TALAS travel adjustingtopcap on top of the left fork leg, shown below. Travel options and direction settings are print-ed directly on the lever.
When changing travel, the TALAS system automatically adjusts to provide you with the ap-propriate linear air spring rate for each travel setting. There is no need to change the air pres-sure in the TALAS air chamber after adjusting travel.
For safety reasons, it is recommended that travel adjustment be done while off the bike. If necessary, travel can be adjusted on-the-fly (be careful when using this "extreme" travel ad- justing method), which can be handy right before a grueling climb or steep descent.
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS SETUP TIPS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow andyour fork willpack down andride harsh.
If you increaseyour spring rateor air pressure,you will need toslow down yourrebound.
6
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and you
will experiencepoor traction andwheel hop.
If you decrease
your spring rateor air pressure,you will need tospeed up yourrebound setting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 112/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS R Page 111
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 113/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla RLC Page 112
32 Vanilla RLC
weight 4.23 lbs. / 1.91 kg
travel 5.5 in. / 140 mm
features/ adjustments low-speed compression, lever-actuatedlockout, lockout force adjust, coil springpreload, rebound
spring/damper type steel spring/open bath
intended use all-mountain, freeride
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 114/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla RLC Page 113
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-ther inspection and repair; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
2. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
3. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
4. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If sag is lower than in the table, turn the preload knob (shown below) counter-clockwiseone (1) full turn. Measure sag again and repeat adjustment if necessary.
If sag is higher than in the table, turn the preload knob clockwise one (1) full turn. Meas-ure sag again and repeat adjustment if necessary. If correct sag cannot be achieved byadjusting the preload knob, see the Vanilla Coil Spring Setting Guidelines table below. You
may need to change to a coil spring with a different spring rate.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 115/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla RLC Page 114
Vanilla Coil Spring Setting Guidelines
FOXPart #
ApproximateSpring Rate
ColorCode
Travel(mm)
RiderWeightlbs. (kg)
039-05-080
40.6 lb/in Black 140 <90–115(40.8-52.2)
039-05-081
48.5 lb/in Purple 140 115–150(52.2-68.0)
039-05-082
56.4 lb/in Blue 140 150–180(68.0-81.6)
039-05-083
60.9 lb/in Green 140 180–210(81.6-95.3)
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM Freeride/All-MountainPLUSH
140 mm (5.5") 20 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1.25")
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag Change to higher rate coilspring
Too little sag Change to lower rate coil spring
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 116/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla RLC Page 115
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Excessive bottoming Change to higher rate coilspring
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
Change to lower rate coil spring
KNOBSETTING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNI NG TI PS SETUP TI PS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will packdown and rideharshly.
If you increase yourspring rate or airpressure, you willneed to slow downyour rebound.
6
(Factorysetting)
Average Re-bound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experiencepoor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate orair pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 117/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla RLC Page 116
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing and
sprinting situations, but will sag with the rider’s weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the eventthat a big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
Note : The fo r k m ay cycle a coup le o f t im es af te r enab l i ng l ockou t . Once com -
p le te l ockou t i s ach ieved , the fo r k m ay con t i nue to m ove 3 to 5 m m . Th i s i s
no r m a l and does no t a f fec t pe r fo r m ance.
Adjusting Lockout ForceEven when your fork is fully locked out, there are instances when you still want your fork tobe active. To protect your fork’s internal parts, your FOX fork will "blowoff" when it encountersan intense hit. You can adjust when the fork blows off—lockout force—by adjusting the blueknob on the bottom of the right leg.
A convenient tuning feature of the lockout force knob is that it allows you to leave your forkin the locked out position—no more fiddling with fork controls when the trail requires your un-divided attention. Although you might need to adjust the knob a few times to find the sweetspot, once it is found you can simply leave your fork locked out. Your fork will then respondto hits in the trail (greater lockout force), for example, but will be locked out (lower lockoutforce) when you are out of your saddle on a climb.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase lockout force and counterclockwise to decrease lockoutforce.
There are 12 clicks of adjustment. As a starting point, turn the knob all the way clockwise untilit stops, then back off one click counterclockwise.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 118/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla RLC Page 117
Adjusting Low -Speed CompressionLow-speed compression damping is adjusted with the blue bezel ring (shown below) below theblue lockout lever, and has 8 clicks of adjustment. Compression damping controls the speedat which the fork compresses. Adjust low-speed compression with lockout disabled (lockout
lever fully counterclockwise). As a starting point, turn the low-speed compression dial all theway counterclockwise (full out) until it stops, then turn clockwise (in) 5 clicks.
KNOBSETTING(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNINGTIPS
SETUP TIP S
1
Soft Compression Too soft andyour fork willpack down andride harshly.
Maximum wheeltraction and bumpcompliance. Toosoft and you mayhave excessivebrake dive andwallowy feel.
5(Factory set-ting)
Average Com-pression
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 119/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla RLC Page 118
Changing the Coil Spring
Note : 32 m m Van i l l a fo r ks canno t be r educed i n t r ave l .
1. With a 26 mm 6-point socket wrench, loosen and remove the preload topcap (top of leftleg).
2. Compress the fork slightly and remove the coil spring. You may need to firmly pull up onthe spring to disengage it from the plunger shaft.
3. Wipe the spring dry with a rag and check the color code.4. Install the new spring by dropping it into the upper tube.
5. Torque the topcap to 165 in-lb. (1864 N-cm).
6. Rotate the fork to a horizontal position and shake it to move the oil inside the fork overthe spring. This lubricates it before its first travel push.
7. Measure and set sag.
9
Firm Compres-sion
Too firm andyou will experi-ence poor trac-tion and wheelhop.
Resists brake diveand keeps the forkup in the travel.Too firm and youmay have poortraction in loose
conditions.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 120/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla RL Page 119
32 Vanilla RL
weight 4.20 lbs. / 1.90 kg
travel 5.5 in. / 140 mm
features/ adjustments lever-actuated lockout, coil spring preload,rebound
spring/ damper type steel spring/open bath
intended use all-mountain, freeride
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 121/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla RL Page 120
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-ther inspection and repair.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
2. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
3. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
4. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If sag is lower than in the table, turn the preload knob (shown below) counter-clockwiseone (1) full turn. Measure sag again and repeat adjustment if necessary.
If sag is higher than in the table, turn the preload knob clockwise one (1) full turn. Meas-ure sag again and repeat adjustment if necessary. If correct sag cannot be achieved byadjusting the preload knob, see the Vanilla Coil Spring Setting Guidelines table below. You
may need to change to a coil spring with a different spring rate.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 122/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla RL Page 121
Vanilla Coil Spring Setting Guidelines
FOX Part#
Approximate SpringRate
ColorCode
Travel(mm)
RiderWeightlbs. (kg)
039-05-080
40.6 lb/in Black 140 <90–115(40.8-52.2)
039-05-081
48.5 lb/in Purple 140 115–150(52.2-68.0)
039-05-082
56.4 lb/in Blue 140 150–180(68.0-81.6)
039-05-083
60.9 lb/in Green 140 180–210(81.6-95.3)
SAG SETUP
Travel XC/ Race FIRM Freeride/
All-Mountain PLUSH
140 mm (5.5") 20 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1.25")
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag Change to higher rate coil spring
Too little sag Change to lower rate coil spring
Excessive bottoming Change to higher rate coil spring
Harsh ride; full travel not utilized Change to lower rate coil spring
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 123/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla RL Page 122
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) until
it stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing andsprinting situations, but will sag with the rider’s weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the eventthat a big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
KNOBSETTING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNI NG TI PS SETUP TI PS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will packdown and rideharshly.
If you increase yourspring rate or airpressure, you willneed to slow downyour rebound
6
(Factorysetting)
Average Re-
bound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experiencepoor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate orair pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 124/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla RL Page 123
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
Changing the Coil Spring
Note : 32 m m Van i l l a fo r ks canno t be r educed i n t r ave l .
1. With a 26 mm 6-point socket wrench, loosen and remove the preload topcap (top of left
leg).2. Compress the fork slightly and remove the coil spring. You may need to firmly pull up on
the spring to disengage it from the plunger shaft.
3. Wipe the spring dry with a rag and check the color code.
4. Install the new spring by dropping it into the upper tube.
5. Torque the topcap to 165 in-lb. (1864 N-cm).
6. Rotate the fork to a horizontal position and shake it to move the oil inside the fork overthe spring. This lubricates it before its first travel push.
7. Measure and set sag.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 125/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla R Page 124
32 Vanilla R
weight 4.16 lbs. / 1.88 kg
travel 5.5 in. / 140 mm
features/ adjustments coil spring preload, rebound
spring/damper type steel spring/open bath
intended use all-mountain, freeride
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 126/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla R Page 125
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-ther inspection and repair; see “Using the FOX High Pressure Pump” on page 316.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
2. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
3. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
4. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If sag is lower than in the table, turn the preload knob (shown below) counter-clockwiseone (1) full turn. Measure sag again and repeat adjustment if necessary.
If sag is higher than in the table, turn the preload knob clockwise one (1) full turn. Meas-ure sag again and repeat adjustment if necessary. If correct sag cannot be achieved byadjusting the preload knob, see the Vanilla Coil Spring Setting Guidelines table below. You
may need to change to a coil spring with a different spring rate.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 127/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla R Page 126
Vanilla Coil Spring Setting Guidelines
FOXPart #
ApproximateSpring Rate
ColorCode
Travel(mm)
RiderWeightlbs. (kg)
039-05-080
40.6 lb/in Black 140 <90–115(40.8-52.2)
039-05-081
48.5 lb/in Purple 140 115–150(52.2-68.0)
039-05-082
56.4 lb/in Blue 140 150–180(68.0-81.6)
039-05-083
60.9 lb/in Green 140 180–210(81.6-95.3)
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM Freeride/All-Mountain PLUSH
140 mm (5.5") 20 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1.25")
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag Change to higher rate coil spring
Too little sag Change to lower rate coil spring
Excessive bottoming Change to higher rate coil spring
Harsh ride; full travel not utilized Change to lower rate coil spring
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 128/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla R Page 127
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) until
it stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Changing the Coil Spring
Note : 32 m m Van i l l a fo r ks canno t be r educed i n t r ave l .
1. With a 26 mm 6-point socket wrench, loosen and remove the preload topcap (top of leftleg).
2. Compress the fork slightly and remove the coil spring. You may need to firmly pull up onthe spring to disengage it from the plunger shaft.
KNOB
SETTING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-
SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS SETUP TI PS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will packdown and rideharsh.
If you increase yourspring rate or airpressure, you willneed to slow downyour rebound
6
(Factory set-
ting)
Average Re-bound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experiencepoor traction andwheel hop.
If you decrease yourspring rate or airpressure, you willneed to speed upyour rebound set-ting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 129/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 Vanilla R Page 128
3. Wipe the spring dry with a rag and check the color code.
4. Install the new spring by dropping it into the upper tube.
5. Torque the topcap to 165 in-lb. (1864 N-cm).
6. Rotate the fork to a horizontal position and shake it to move the oil inside the fork overthe spring. This lubricates it before its first travel push.
7. Measure and set sag.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 130/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 36 mm Fork Page 129
Installing a 36 mm Fork
Caut ion : FOX Rac ing Shox h igh l y r ecom m ends th a t a qua l i f i ed b i cycle techn i c ian
i ns ta l l t he 36 m m fo r k on you r b i c ycle . I m p r ope r l y i ns ta l l ed fo r ks ar e dange r ous ,and can cause l oss o f con t r o l and se r i ous o r fa ta l i n j u r i es . Read th i s sec t i on i n i t s
en t i r e t y be fo r e beg inn ing t he i ns ta l l at i on o f you r FOX 36 mm fo r k .
To install the FOX 36 mm fo rk on your bicycle:
1. Remove the old fork from the bicycle.
2. Remove the crown race from the old fork.
3. Measure the steerer tube length of the old fork. Transfer this measurement to your newFOX fork’s steerer tube. If there is no old fork to measure by, cut the steerer to the properlength with the following procedure:
4. Install the new fork on the bicycle using all of the headset parts. Use a crown race setter
to install the crown race firmly against the top of the crown.5. Install the headset spacers (these might not be required) and stem on the steerer, and
lightly tighten the stem clamp bolt(s).
6. Mark the steerer tube with a scribe at the top edge of the stem.
7. If it is necessary to cut the steerer tube, measure tw ice and cut once! It is recommend-ed that a cutting guide be used when cutting the steerer tube. If the steerer has any nicksor gouges, the crown/steerer/upper tube assembly must be replaced.
W a r n i n g ! A n i ck o r goug e can cause the s tee r e r to fa i l p r ema t u r e l y , and cause
l oss of con t r o l o f t he b i cyc le and se r i ous o r fa t a l i n j u r i es .
8. Remove the new fork from the bicycle and cut the steerer tube ~4-10 mm below thescribed mark. This ~4-10 mm of clearance allows room for the stem cap to lightly tensionthe headset, to eliminate any free play. Refer to your stem manufacturer’s instructions tobe sure there will be enough clamping surface for the stem.
9. Use a flat file to de-burr the outer and inner top edges of the newly cut steerer tube.
10. Install the star-fangled nut: with a star-fangled nut installation tool, install the star-fanglednut into the steerer to the proper depth (see the star-fangled nut installation depth draw-ing below).
Note : The to ta l he igh t o f spacer s used on a FOX s tee r e r tube shou ld neve r ex -
c ee d 3 0 m m .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 131/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 36 mm Fork Page 130
11.Using a crown race setter to install the crown race firmly against the top of the crown.12. Install all headset parts and stem spacers (if these spacers are required).
13.Torque the star-fangled nut to the stem manufacturer’s specifications, and also torque thestem clamping bolt(s) to specification at this time.
14.The headset should be so well adjusted that it turns freely without drag or free play.
Tire Sizes
The 36 will accept tire sizes up to 2.80 inches wide. Any tire larger than 26 x 2.60 must bechecked for clearance using the following method.
Determining correct tire size
With the tire installed and inflated on the rim, measure the following three dimensions:
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 132/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 36 mm Fork Page 131
• Maximum Peak Tire Diameter = 694 mm = 27.3 inch• Maximum Edge Tire Diameter = 670 mm = 26.41 inch• Maximum Tire Width = 71 mm = 2.80 inch
W a r n i n g ! D o n o t u s e a t i r e i f a n y m e a su r e m e n t e x ce ed s t h e m a x i m u m d i m e n -
s ions show n above . Using l a r ge r t i r es i s no t r ecomm ended and can cause se r i ous
o r fa ta l i n j u r i es .
1. See “Using the 36 Quick-Release Lever” on page 135.
2. Setting handlebars straight and torquing stem bolts:
• Set the bike on the ground and sit on your bike to set the handlebars straight relativeto the front wheel.
• Tighten the stem pinch bolts and torque fasteners according to the stem manufac-turer’s specifications.
• Check that the handlebar pinch bolts are tightened to the stem manufacturer’s torquespecifications.
Post Mount Disc Brake Installation
Caut ion : VERY I MPORTANT! The d isc b rak e ca l ipe r m oun t in g bo l t s mus t have 10-
1 2 m m o f t h r e a d e n g ag e m e n t w i t h t h e f o r k . Be su r e t h e s e m o u n t i n g b o l t s a r e to r q ue w r ench - t i gh t ened to the m anu fac tu r e r ’ s spec if i ca t i on . I n any case, the
d i sc b r ake cal i pe r moun t i ng bo l t t i gh ten ing t o r que l eve l m us t never exceed 9 0
i n - l b .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 133/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 36 mm Fork Page 132
The 36 is designed for use with disc brakes with disc rotor sizes of 160 – 205 mm only. The36 can use XC or DH mechanical or hydraulic brake systems.
Caut ion : Neve r mod i f y t he l ow e r l eg , o r use can t i l e ve r r im b r akes .
The 36 disc bolt pattern uses:
For use wi th XC size rotor (160 – 180 mm outside diameter):
- XC caliper
- XC caliper mount for international XC mount pattern
OR
For use wi th DH size rotor (200 – 205 mm outside diameter):
- XC caliper
1. Install DH disc brake system according to disc brake manufacturer’s specifications. Be sureto torque all fasteners and bolts to manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Consult the manual that came with your disc brakes for proper installation procedures. It
is recommended that NEW disc brake pads be installed to ensure proper alignment and tominimize drag.
3. Test brakes for proper operation on flat land before hitting the trails.
4. Route the disc brake hose (for hydraulic disc brakes) or brake cable housing (for mechan-ical disc brakes) from the caliper to the inside of the lower leg and through the supplieddisc brake hose guide, and assemble the FOX disc brake hose guide parts as shown in thefigures below.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 134/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 36 mm Fork Page 133
5. Cut your Brake hose or brake cable housing to the correct length and assemble accordingto disc brake manufacturer’s specifications.
6. Tighten the disc brake hose guide screw with a 2.5 mm hex key wrench and torque to 8in-lb (90 N-cm).
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 135/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 36 mm Fork Page 134
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 136/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Using the 36 Quick-Release Lever Page 135
Using the 36 Quick-Release Lever
1. Before installing wheel, check that quick-release levers are in the open position (step 1 inthe drawing below). Place the wheel into the dropouts of the fork, and slide the axle in
through the fork and through the hub (step 2).
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 137/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Using the 36 Quick-Release Lever Page 136
2. Thread the axle in until hand tight.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 138/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Using the 36 Quick-Release Lever Page 137
3. Rotate the axle lever to the closed position and push until it has clicked in.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 139/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Using the 36 Quick-Release Lever Page 138
4. Close both QR Levers by rotating until the backside of lever contacts the lower leg.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 140/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 FLOAT RC2 & R Page 139
36 FLOAT RC2 & R
weightRC2: 4.78 lbs. / 2.16 kgR: 4.69 lbs. / 2.12 kg
travel 6.3 in. / 160 mm
features/ adjustments RC2 low-speed compression, high-speed com-pression, internal bottom-out resistance, airspring pressure, rebound
features/ adjustments R internal bottom-out resistance, air springpressure, rebound
spring/damper type air/RC2 FIT damper
intended use downhill, all-mountain, freeride
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 141/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 FLOAT RC2 & R Page 140
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 36 mm Fork” on page129.
Before You Ride
1. Check that the 20 mm axle pinch bolts and crown pinch bolts are properly adjusted andtightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-
ther inspection and repair; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the center blue aircap (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose theSchrader valve.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve; see “Using the FOX
High Pressure Pump” on page 316.3. Using the 36 FLOAT Air Spring Setting Guidelines table below, pump your fork to the ap-
propriate setting using the FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 142/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 FLOAT RC2 & R Page 141
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table , screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag againand repeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
36 FLOAT Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air P ressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 48 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 50 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 53 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 55 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 62 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 69 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 76 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 83 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 90 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM Freeride PLUSH
100 mm (4") 15 mm (1/2") 20 mm (3/4")
130 mm (5") 20 mm (3/4") 32 mm (1.25")
160 mm (6.3") 20 mm (3/4") 40 mm (1.5")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 143/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 FLOAT RC2 & R Page 142
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 15 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 8 clicks.
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOBSETTING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNI NG TIPS SETUP TI PS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will pack downand ride harsh.
If you increase yourspring rate or airpressure, you will
need to slow downyour rebound
8
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 144/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 FLOAT RC2 & R Page 143
Adjusting High-Speed Compression (RC2 only)High-speed compression damping controls the force it takes to move the fork through its trav-el and how the wheel reacts to a bump. This adjuster rotates to stops at each end and has 15clicks of adjustment. It is set from the factory at 8 clicks out from the full closed (clockwise)position. The knob is protected by the black protective cap. Never ride your FOX 36 withoutthe black protective cap.
15
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experiencepoor traction andwheel hop.
If you decrease yourspring rate or airpressure, you willneed to speed upyour rebound set-ting.
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS
1
Soft Compression Maximum wheel traction and bumpcompliance. If setting is too soft, youmay bottom often on square-edgedhits and G-outs.
8
(Factory set-ting)
Average Compression
15
Firm Compression Reduces bottom-out and providesmaximum bump absorption. If settingis too firm, you may experience a
harsh ride with bad traction and usetoo little available travel.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 145/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 FLOAT RC2 & R Page 144
Adjusting Low -Speed Compression (RC2 only)Low-speed compression damping controls the influence of the rider’s weight shifts and bikeattitude under braking. This adjuster rotates to stops at each end and has 17 clicks of adjust-ment. It is set from the factory at 8 clicks out from the full closed (clockwise) position. Theknob is protected by the black protective cap. Never ride your FOX 36 without the black pro-
tective cap.
Hydraulic Bottom-Out SystemThe 36 VAN is equipped with a patent-pending Internally Adjustable Hydraulic Bottom-OutControl System. This feature can be adjusted inside the cartridge by FOX Racing Shox or anAuthorized Service Center. It comes preset from the factory at the FIRM setting.
Changing TravelTravel on your 36 FLOAT fork can be changed by rearranging the internal travel spacers. Afterchanging travel check the fork for proper operation before riding. If there is noticeable play inthe fork or if it makes strange noises, disassemble the fork and check for complete numberand correct orientation of spacers.
KNOB SET-
TING(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
SETTING DE-
SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS
1
Soft Compression Maximum wheel traction and bumpcompliance. Too soft and you maybehave excessive brake dive and wal-lowy feel.
8
(Factory set-ting)
Average Compression
17
Firm Compression Resists brake dive and keeps thefork up in the travel. Too firm andyou may have poor traction in looseconditions.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 146/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 FLOAT RC2 & R Page 145
Note : 36 FLOAT fo r ks can be reduced in t r ave l , bu t t hey cannot be inc reased
b ey o n d 1 6 0 m m .
Tools Required for Travel Change
• 32 mm 6-sided socket
• 10 mm socket
• Small screwdriver
• Torque wrench
• 2 mm hex key wrench
• Oil drain pan
• 1.5 mm hex key wrench
• Plastic-faced hammer
• Measuring container w/ cc or mL increments
Supplies Required for Travel Change
1. Remove the blue air cap from the top of the left fork leg. Let the air out of the fork. Removethe left top cap with a 32 mm socket 6-point socket wrench.
2. Loosen the bottom nut 3-4 turns with a 10 mm wrench. With a plastic mallet, gently tapthe bottom of the shaft to disengage it from the lower leg. Allow oil to drain into a bucket.
Remove the bottom nut and crush washer.3. Compress the fork as much as possible. The air piston will be visible about one inch below
the top of the upper tube. Push the bottom of the air shaft upwards to push the air pistonout of the top of the upper tube. Use a long, thin shaft screwdriver to push the bottom of the air shaft up through the hole in the bottom of the lower leg.
Supplies Required
Quantity PartNumber
Part Name
1 025-03-004-A
1 qt. bottle of FOX Suspension Fluid(7 wt.)
1 025-03-
002-A
5 cc Pillow Pack of FOX FLOAT Fluid
2 241-01-002-C
Crush washer
1 803-00-078 FLOAT Forx Air Piston Seal Kit (op-tional)
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 147/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 FLOAT RC2 & R Page 146
4. Pull the air-shaft assembly from the fork. Refer to the drawings below and add or removethe appropriate number of 30 mm spacer(s) to achieve the desired travel. To achieve 130mm travel, use one 30 mm spacer; 100 mm travel, use both 30 mm spacers. Spacers snaponto the air shaft between the negative spring guide and topout plate, as shown in thetravel spacer orientation drawing below.
5. Lubricate the U-cup seal on the air piston with FOX FLOAT Fluid and re-install the air shaft
assembly into the upper tube. Be sure to orient the U-cup seal as shown in the Seal Ori-entation drawing below.
6. Push the shaft until it approaches the bottom hole of the fork. Do not push the shaft allthe way through the bottom hole.
7. Turn the fork upside down. Measure and pour 30 cc of FOX Suspension Fluid through thebottom hole.
8. Push the air shaft assembly up until the shaft comes through the bottom hole. Install thecrush washer and bottom nut. Torque to 50 in-lbs.
9. Turn the fork right side up. Pour 5 cc of FOX FLOAT Fluid on top of the air piston.
10. Lubricate the o-ring on the air topcap with FOX FLOAT Fluid.
11.Re-install the topcap and torque to 165 in-lbs.
12. Pump up the fork to the desired pressure and cycle it several times to check for properoperation.
13.Re-install the blue air cap.
14.You’re done. Go ride.
Travel Spacer Orientation
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 148/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 FLOAT RC2 & R Page 147
Seal Orientation
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 149/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 TALAS RC2 & R Page 148
36 TALAS RC2 & R
weightRC2: 5.08 lbs. / 2.30 kgR: 4.99 lbs. / 2.26 kg
travel TALAS 160+130+100 mm
features/ adjustments RC2 TALAS travel adjust, low-speed compres-sion, high-speed compression, hydraulicbottom-out in damper, air spring pressure,rebound
features/ adjustments R TALAS travel adjust, hydraulic bottom-out indamper, air spring pressure, rebound
spring/damper type air/RC2 FIT damper
intended use downhill, all-mountain, freeride
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 150/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 TALAS RC2 & R Page 149
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 36 mm Fork” on page129.
Before You Ride
1. Check that the 20 mm axle pinch bolts and crown pinch bolts are properly adjusted andtightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-
ther inspection and repair; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the center blue aircap in the middle of the TALAS travel adjusting topcap on topof the left fork leg (shown below), to expose the Schrader valve. Hold the TALAS leversteady with one hand while unscrewing the aircap with the other. This will facilitate remov-al of the aircap and also protect the TALAS lever from being forced past its stops.
2. Set the lever in the long travel position and cycle the fork a few times.
3. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve; see “Using the FOXHigh Pressure Pump” on page 316.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 151/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 TALAS RC2 & R Page 150
4. Using the 36 TALAS Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriatesetting using the FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
5. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
6. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
7. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
8. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table , screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag againand repeat adjustment if necessary.
9. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
36 TALAS Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 48 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 50 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 53 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 55 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 62 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 69 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 76 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 83 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 90 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM Freeride PLUSH
100 mm (4") 15 mm (1/2") 20 mm (3/4")
130 mm (5") 20 mm (3/4") 32 mm (1.25")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 152/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 TALAS RC2 & R Page 151
Note : Sag and sp r i ng r a t e w i l l se l f - ad jus t t o the p r ope r se t t i n g and r a te , as
TALAS i s ad ju s ted t o sho r t e r t r ave l pos i t i ons .
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 15 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 8 clicks.
160 mm (6.3") 20 mm (3/4") 40 mm (1.5")
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKS
OUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIP S SETUP TI PS
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 153/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 TALAS RC2 & R Page 152
Adjusting High-Speed Compression (RC2 only)High-speed compression damping controls the force it takes to move the fork through its trav-el and how the wheel reacts to a bump. This adjuster rotates to stops at each end and has 15clicks of adjustment. It is set from the factory at 8 clicks out from the full closed (clockwise)position. The knob is protected by the black protective cap. Never ride your FOX 36 withoutthe black protective cap.
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will packdown and rideharsh.
If you increaseyour spring rate orair pressure, youwill need to slowdown your re-bound
8
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
15
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experiencepoor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate orair pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS
1
Soft Compression Maximum wheel traction and bump
compliance. If setting is too soft, youmay bottom often on square-edgedhits and G-outs.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 154/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 TALAS RC2 & R Page 153
Adjusting Low -Speed Compression (RC2 only)Low-speed compression damping controls the influence of the rider’s weight shifts and bikeattitude under braking. This adjuster rotates to stops at each end and has 17 clicks of adjust-ment. It is set from the factory at 8 clicks out from the full closed (clockwise) position. Theknob is protected by the black protective cap. Never ride your FOX 36 without the black pro-tective cap.
8
(Factory set-ting)
Average Compression
15
Firm Compression Reduces bottom-out and providesmaximum bump absorption. If set-
ting is too firm, you may experiencea harsh ride with bad traction anduse too little available travel.
KNOB SET-TING
(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS
1
Soft Compression Maximum wheel traction andbump compliance. Too soft andyou maybe have excessive brakedive and wallowy feel.
8
(Factory set-ting)
Average Compression
17
Firm Compression Resists brake dive and keeps thefork up in the travel. Too firm andyou may have poor traction inloose conditions.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 155/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 TALAS RC2 & R Page 154
Hydraulic Bottom-Out SystemThe 36 VAN is equipped with a patent-pending internally adjustable Hydraulic Bottom-OutControl System. This feature can be adjusted inside the cartridge by FOX Racing Shox or anAuthorized Service Center. It comes preset from the factory at the FIRM setting.
Changing Travel36 TALAS forks feature three externally adjustable travel choices from 6.3 (160 mm) to 5"(130 mm) to 4 (100 mm), which are easily selected using the TALAS travel adjusting topcapon top of the left fork leg, shown below. Travel options and direction settings are printed di-rectly on the topcap.
When changing travel, the TALAS system automatically adjusts to provide you with the ap-propriate linear air spring rate for each travel setting. There is no need to change the air pres-sure in the TALAS air chamber after adjusting travel.
For safety reasons, it is recommended that travel adjustment be done while off the bike. If necessary, travel can be adjusted on-the-fly (be careful when using this "extreme" travel ad- justing method), which can be handy right before a grueling climb or steep descent.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 156/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 VAN RC2 & R Page 155
36 VAN RC2 & R
weightRC2: 5.21 lbs. / 2.36 kgR: 5.12 lbs. / 2.32 kg
travel 6.3 in. / 160 mm
features/ adjustments RC2 low-speed compression, high-speed com-pression, hydraulic bottom-out in damper,coil spring preload, rebound
features/ adjustments hydraulic bottom-out in damper, coil springpreload, rebound
spring/damper type steel spring/RC2 FIT damper
intended use downhill, all-mountain, freeride
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 157/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 VAN RC2 & R Page 156
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 36 mm Fork” on page129.
Before You Ride
1. Check that the 20 mm axle pinch bolts and crown pinch bolts are properly adjusted andtightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-
ther inspection and repair; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
2. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
3. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
4. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If sag is low er than in the table, turn the preload knob (shown below) counter-clock-wise one (1) full turn. Measure sag again and repeat adjustment if necessary.
If sag is higher than in the table, turn the preload knob clockwise one (1) full turn.
Measure sag again and repeat adjustment if necessary. If correct sag cannot be achievedby adjusting the preload knob, see the 36 Van Coil Spring Setting Guidelines table below.You may need to change to a coil spring with a different spring rate.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 158/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 VAN RC2 & R Page 157
36 Van Coil Spring Setting Guidelines
FOX Part#
SpringRate
ColorCode
TravelRange
RiderWeightLbs.
039-05-050
35 lb/in Black 160 <90–115
039-05-051
40 lb/in Purple 160 115–155
039-05-052
45 lb/in Blue 160 150–180
039-05-053
50 lb/in Green 160 175–210
039-05-054
55 lb/in Yellow 160 205–240+
Sag Setup
Travel Race FIRM Freeride PLUSH
160 mm (6.3") 24 mm (15/16") 40 mm (1.5")
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag Change to higher rate coilspring
Too little sag Change to lower rate coil spring
Excessive bottoming Change to higher rate coilspring
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 159/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 VAN RC2 & R Page 158
Adjusting Rebound
The rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 15 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 8 clicks.
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
Change to lower rate coil spring
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TI PS SETUP TIPS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will packdown and ride
harsh.
If you increaseyour spring rate orair pressure, you
will need to slowdown your re-bound
8
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
15
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experiencepoor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate orair pressure, youwill need to speedup your rebound
setting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 160/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 VAN RC2 & R Page 159
Adjusting High-Speed Compression (RC2 only)High-speed compression damping controls the force it takes to move the fork through its trav-el and how the wheel reacts to a bump. This adjuster rotates to stops at each end and has 15clicks of adjustment. It is set from the factory at 8 clicks out from the full closed (clockwise)position. The knob is protected by the black protective cap. Never ride your FOX 36 without
the black protective cap.
KNOB SET-
TING(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
SETTING DE-
SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS
1
Soft Compression Maximum wheel traction and bumpcompliance. If setting is too soft, youmay bottom often on square-edgedhits and G-outs.
8
(Factory set-ting)
Average Compression
15
Firm Compression Reduces bottom-out and providesmaximum bump absorption. If set-ting is too firm, you may experiencea harsh ride with bad traction anduse too little available travel.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 161/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 VAN RC2 & R Page 160
Adjusting Low -Speed Compression (RC2 only)Low-speed compression damping controls the influence of the rider’s weight shifts and bikeattitude under braking. This adjuster rotates to stops at each end and has 17 clicks of adjust-ment. It is set from the factory at 8 clicks out from the full closed (clockwise) position. Theknob is protected by the black protective cap. Never ride your FOX 36 without the black pro-
tective cap.
Hydraulic Bottom-Out SystemThe 36 VAN is equipped with a patent-pending Internally Adjustable Hydraulic Bottom-OutControl System. This feature can be adjusted inside the cartridge by FOX Racing Shox or anAuthorized Service Center. It comes preset from the factory at the FIRM setting.
KNOB SET-
TING(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
SETTING DE-
SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS
1
Soft Compression Maximum wheel traction andbump compliance. Too soft andyou maybe have excessive brakedive and wallowy feel.
8
(Factory set-ting)
Average Compression
17
Firm Compression Resists brake dive and keeps thefork up in the travel. Too firm andyou may have poor traction inloose conditions.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 162/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 36 VAN RC2 & R Page 161
Changing the Coil Spring
Note : 36 VAN fo r ks canno t be r educed i n t r ave l .
1. With a 32 mm 6-point socket wrench, loosen and remove the preload topcap (top of leftleg).
2. Compress the fork slightly and remove the coil spring. You may need to firmly pull up onthe spring to disengage it from the plunger shaft.
3. Wipe the spring dry with a rag and check its color code.
4. Install the new spring by dropping it into the upper tube, then torque the top cap to 165in-lbs (1864 N-cm).
5. Rotate the fork to a horizontal position and shake it. This lubricates the spring before itsfirst push into travel.
6. Measure and set sag.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 163/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 40 mm Fork Page 162
Installing a 40 mm Fork
1. Verifying the Total Stack Height:
Note : T h e 4 0 d i r e c t m o u n t c r o w n r e q u i r e s a t o t a l st a c k h e i gh t r a n g e f r o m 1 0 5
m m t o 1 6 6.8 m m .
See Figure 1: “40 Headset Stack Height” to understand what defines t o t a l stack he igh t .Measure to verify whether your total stack height falls within this height range specifica-tion.
• If your total stack height is less than 105.0 mm, add a headset spacer betweenthe upper headset parts and the upper crown, to arrive within this total headset stackheight specification.
• If your total stack height is greater than 166.8 mm, consider installing a shorterstack headset.
Note : I f y o u ’ r e i n st a l l i n g a st e e r er t u b e - m o u n t e d s t e m , t h e t o t a l h e i g h t o f
space r s used on a FOX stee r e r t ube shou ld n eve r exceed 30 m m .
Figure 1: 40 Headset Stack Height
The 40 with a direct mount upper crown is assembled with the lower crown set to 163.7 mmbelow the top of the upper tubes (see Figure 2: “40 Crown Height” on page 163). The lower
W a r n i n g ! Have a qua li f i ed b i cyc le mechan ic i ns ta l l t he 40 . I m p r op -
e r l y i ns ta l l ed fo r k s a r e dange r ous , wh ich can cause l oss o f s tee r i ng
con t r o l t ha t can l ead to ser i ous o r fa ta l i n j u r i es .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 164/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 40 mm Fork Page 163
crown position is set to allow 6 mm clearance between the bottom of the crown and the topof a 2.80" tire when bottomed out. Do not change the position of the lower crown.
Figure 2: 40 Crown Height
2. Remove the fork and install the crown race:
a. Place the bicycle in a repair stand.
b. Remove the new 40 fork from its packaging.
c. Remove the original fork from the bicycle, if this is the case.
d. Remove the crown race from the original fork with a crown race removal tool, andinstall it with a crown race setter tool onto the new 40. The crown race must be firmlyseated against the top surface of the lower crown.
3. Cut steerer to the proper length:
Note : The FOX 40 can be se t up w i th e i th e r a d i r ec t - mou n t o r a s tee r e r
m o u n t e d s t e m .
W a r n i n g ! I f t h e s t e e r e r h a s an y n i c k s o r g o u g es , t h e c r o w n / s t e er e r
assemb ly m us t be r ep laced . A n i ck o r gouge can cause the s tee r e r t o
fa i l p r ema t u r e l y , w h ich can cause l oss o f con t r o l o f t he b i cyc le r esu l t -
i ng i n se r i ous o r fa ta l i n j u r i es.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 165/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 40 mm Fork Page 164
a. Install your new 40 on the bicycle with all of the headset parts, stem spacers, andupper crown. The deep–pocketed side of the upper crown faces downward on thebicycle.
b. After eliminating play in the headset, lightly tighten the steerer pinch bolt on theupper crown with a 5 mm hex wrench.
c. Add any additional stem spacer(s) or steerer-mounted stem onto the steerer abovethe upper crown that will affect the steerer tube finished cut length. This will dependon personal preference.
d. Mark the steerer with a scribe at the top edge of the uppermost installed part. With adirect mount stem, you can scribe the mark on the steerer at the top edge of the
upper crown.e. Remove the 40 from the bicycle and cut the steerer 3 mm below the scribed mark.
This 3 mm clearance allows room for the stem cap to lightly tension the headset andeliminate any free play.
f. Use a file to de-burr the outer and inner top edges of the newly cut steerer.4. Install the star-fangled nut and steering stop bumpers:
a. With a star-fangled nut installation tool, install the star-fangled nut into the steerer tothe proper depth (see Figure 3: “Star-fangled Nut Installation Depth” on page 165).
Caut ion : Fox Rac ing Shox d oes not m a n u f a ct u r e a d i r e ct m o u n t s tem . Be su r e to r e fe r t o y ou r s tem m anu fac tu r e r ’ s i ns ta l l at i on i n -
s t r uc t i ons . Measure at least tw ice to be certain of all measure-ments, before cutting the fork steerer !
W a r n i n g ! D o n o t cu t t h e st e e r e r m o r e t h a n t h r e e ( 3 ) m m b e l ow
t h e u p p e r m o st i n st a l l ed p a r t . I f t h e s t e er e r l e n g t h i s m i st a k e n l y
cu t too shor t , i t MUST BE REPLACED! Us ing a fo r k w i th c lamped s tee r e r engagemen t t ha t i s t oo sho r t can l ead to sudden fo r k fa i l -
u r e , w h ich can cause i r r ecove r ab le l oss o f con t r o l o f t he b i cycle
r esu l t i ng i n se r i ous o r fa ta l i n j u r i es.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 166/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 40 mm Fork Page 165
Figure 3: Star-fangled Nut Installation Depth
b. Install one steering stop bumper onto each upper tube and place midway on theupper tube (see Figure 4: “40 Upper Crown Installation” on page 166).
5. Installing the fork onto the bicycle:
a. Install the new 40 fork on the bicycle with all of the headset parts, upper crown,spacer(s), and steerer-mount stem (if applicable).
b. Install the stem cap and M6 stem cap bolt.
Note : I t i s im p o r t a n t t h a t t h e D ir e ct M o u n t s t e m s t a y s l oo s e ( N OT t o r q u e -
t i g h t e n e d ) o r u n i n s t a ll e d , t o a l l o w p r o p e r a d j u s t m e n t o f t h e h e ad s et .
c. With all three upper crown bolts left loosened, lightly tighten the headset stem capbolt to remove play in the system so that it turns freely without drag.
d. With a 5 mm hex key socket and torque wrench, torque all three upper crown bolts to
65 in-lb (see Figure 4: “40 Upper Crown Installation” on page 166).
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 167/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 40 mm Fork Page 166
Figure 4: 40 Upper Crown Installation
e. Be sure the torque specification of 65 in-lb is achieved for each of the four lowercrown bolts.
6. Determining correct tire size:
Note : The 40 w i l l a ccep t t i r e s i zes up to 2 .80 i nches w ide . Any t i r e l a r ge r than
26 x 2 .60 m us t be checked fo r c l ear ance .
With the tire installed and inflated on the rim, measure the following three dimensions:
• Maximum Peak Tire Diameter = 694 mm = 27.3 inch
• Maximum Edge Tire Diameter = 670 mm = 26.41 inch
• Maximum Tire Width = 71 mm = 2.80 inch
W a r n i n g ! D o n o t o v e r - t i g h t e n t he p inch bo l t s . Too m uch to r qu e
can dam age the bo l t s , f r ac tu r e th e cr ow n , o r damage the th r eads .
Any o f t hese cou ld cause fo r k fa i l u r e l ead ing to l oss o f con t r o l , r e - su l t i ng w i th se r i ous o r fa ta l i n j u r i es.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 168/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 40 mm Fork Page 167
Figure 5: Proper Tire Diameter
W a r n i n g ! Do no t use a t i r e i f any measu r emen t exceeds the
m ax im um d im ens ions show n above . Using l a r ge r t i r es i s no t r ec - om m ended and can cause se r i ous o r fa ta l i n j u r i es .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 169/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 40 mm Fork Page 168
7. Installing the Front Wheel:
Figure 6: 40 Axle Clamps
Refer to Figure 6: “40 Axle Clamps” for the following procedure:
a. Loosen the four (4) axle pinch bolts on the lower leg with a 5 mm hex key wrench.b. Using a 5 mm hex key wrench, turn the axle counter-clockwise to loosen and remove.
c. Install the front wheel into the dropouts and install the axle into the lower leg.
d. Using a 5 mm hex key wrench, turn clockwise and lightly tighten the axle to the lowerleg to 19 in-lb (215 N-cm) torque.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 170/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 40 mm Fork Page 169
e. Tighten the two left side (from the seated rider’s perspective) dropout pinch-bolts to19 in-lb (215 N-cm) torque.
f. Compress the fork on the bike a couple of times to let the right side of the dropoutfloat and settle to its low-friction point. Tighten the two right side dropout pinch-boltsto 19 in-lb (215 N-cm) torque.
8. Installing the Stem and Handlebars:
a. If installing a Direct Mount stem: use four (4) M6 x 1 threaded bolts in accordancewith the stem manufacturer’s assembly instructions. Be sure to confirm the followingcriteria:
• There must be a minimum of 10 mm of thread engagement of the boltsinto the upper crown .
• The torque specification of the four (4) M6 mounting bolts must notexceed 110 in-lb (124 N-cm) .
• If the bolts protrude from the bottom of the crow n, be sure there is nointerference with the frame or cables throughout the entire span of forkrotation.
If installing a Steerer Mounted stem: tighten the steerer pinch bolts on the stem,according to the stem manufacturer’s instructions.
Figure 7: 40 Upper Crown International 4-Bolt Pattern (Specification)
b Set the bike on the ground and sit on your bike, to set the handlebar position.
c. Rotate the handlebars to your desired position, and tighten the handlebar pinch boltsto the stem manufacturer’s torque specification.
9. Adjusting the position of the steering stop bumpers
a. Adjust the height and angle of the steering stop bumpers on the upper tubes, so thatyou have the maximum turning angle and protect your frame and upper tubes fromgetting dented in a crash.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 171/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 40 mm Fork Page 170
b. Depending on the shape and size of the frame tubes, you may need to use the tallpart of the bumper to contact the frame tubes.
Disc Brake InstallationThe 40 is designed only for use with DH disc brakes with disc rotor sizes of 200 – 225 mm.
The 40 can use DH mechanical or hydraulic disc brake systems.
The 40 disc bolt pattern uses:
• XC Caliper
• XC Caliper Mount for International XC mount pattern
• DH Size Rotor (200 – 225 mm outside diameter)
1. Install the DH disc brake system, according to disc brake manufacturer’s specifications.
2. Be sure to torque all fasteners and bolts to manufacturer’s recommendations. Consult theinstructions that came with your disc brakes for proper installation procedures. It is rec-ommended that NEW disc brake pads be installed, to ensure proper alignment and to min-imize drag.
3. Route the disc brake hose (for hydraulic disc brakes) or brake cable housing (for mechan-ical disc brakes) from the caliper to the inside of the lower leg and through the supplieddisc brake hose guide as shown in Figure 8: “40 Brake Hose Guide Installation and 40 DiscBrake Hose Guide Routing” on page 171.
4. Tighten the disc brake hose guide screw (M3 x 12) with a 2.5 mm hex key wrench, and
torque it to 8 in-lb (90 N-cm).5. Test the brakes for proper operation on flat land before hitting the trails.
Caut ion : Neve r mod i f y the l ow e r l eg o r use can t i l e ve r r im
b r akes .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 172/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Installing a 40 mm Fork Page 171
Figure 8: 40 Brake Hose Guide Installation and 40 Disc Brake Hose Guide Routing
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 173/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 40 RC2 Page 172
40 RC2
weight 6.83 lbs. / 3.09 kg
travel 8 in. / 203 mm, adjustable in ½-inch incre-ments down to 6 in.
features/ adjustments internally adjustable travel, low-speed com-pression, high-speed compression, hydraulicbottom-out in damper, coil spring preload,rebound
spring/damper type titanium spring/RC2 FIT damper
intended use downhill, freeride
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 174/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 40 RC2 Page 173
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 40 mm Fork” on page162.
Before You Ride
1. Check that the 20 mm axle pinch bolts and crown pinch bolts are properly adjusted andtightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for fur-
ther inspection and repair; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
2. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
3. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
4. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If sag is low er than in the table, turn the preload knob (shown below) counter-clock-wise one (1) full turn. Measure sag again and repeat adjustment if necessary.
If sag is higher than in the table, turn the preload knob clockwise one (1) full turn.
Measure sag again and repeat adjustment if necessary. If correct sag cannot be achievedby adjusting the preload knob, see the 40 Coil Spring Settings table below. You may needto obtain a coil with a different spring rate.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 175/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 40 RC2 Page 174
40 Coil Spring Settings
FOX Part # Spring Rate Co lo r Code R ider Weight ( lbs.)
039-05-070 30 lb/in Black < 90 – 120
039-05-071 35 lb/in Purple 120 – 150
039-05-062 40 lb/in Blue 150 –180
039-05-073 45 lb/in Green 180 – 210
039-05-074 50 lb/in Yellow 210 – > 240
Sag Setup
Travel 15 - 25% Sag
6 in. (152 mm) 0.9 - 1.5 in. (23 - 38 mm)
6.5 in. (165 mm) 1.0 - 1.6 in. (25 - 41 mm)
7 in. (178 mm) 1.1 - 1.8 in. (27 - 45 mm)
7.5 in. (191 mm) 1.1 - 1.9 in. (29 - 48 mm)
8 in. (203 mm) 1.2 - 2.0 in. (30 - 51 mm)
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag Change to higher rate coilspring
Too little sag Change to lower rate coil spring
Excessive bottoming Change to higher rate coilspring
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 176/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 40 RC2 Page 175
Adjusting Rebound
The rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 15 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 8 clicks.
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
Change to lower rate coil spring
Knob Set-ting(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
Setting De-scription
Tuning Tips Setup Tips
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will packdown and rideharsh.
If you increase yourspring rate or airpressure, you willneed to slow downyour rebound
8
(Factorysetting)
Average Re-bound
15
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experiencepoor traction andwheel hop.
If you decrease yourspring rate or airpressure, you willneed to speed upyour rebound set-ting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 177/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 40 RC2 Page 176
Adjusting High-Speed Compression (RC2 only)High-speed compression damping controls the force it takes to move the fork through itstravel and how the wheel reacts to a bump. This adjuster rotates to stops at each end and has15 clicks of adjustment. It is set from the factory at 8 clicks out from the full closed (clockwise)position. The knob is protected by the black protective cap. Never ride your FOX 40 without
the black protective cap.
Knob Set-
ting(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
Setting De-
scription
Tuning Tips
1
Soft Compression Maximum wheel traction and bumpcompliance. If setting is too soft, youmay bottom often on square-edged hitsand G-outs.
8
(Factory set-ting)
Average Compres-sion
15
Firm Compression Reduces bottom-out and provides max-imum bump absorption. If setting is toofirm, you may experience a harsh ridewith bad traction and use too little avail-able travel.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 178/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 40 RC2 Page 177
Adjusting Low -Speed Compression (RC2 only)Low-speed compression damping controls the influence of the rider’s weight shifts and bikeattitude under braking. This adjuster rotates to stops at each end and has 17 clicks of adjust-ment. It is set from the factory at 8 clicks out from the full closed (clockwise) position. Theknob is protected by the black protective cap. Never ride your FOX 40 without the black pro-
tective cap.
Hydraulic Bottom-Out SystemThe 40 is equipped with a patent-pending Internally Adjustable Hydraulic Bottom-Out ControlSystem. This feature can be adjusted inside the cartridge by FOX Racing Shox or an Author-ized Service Center. It comes preset from the factory at the FIRM setting.
Changing the Coil Spring1. With a 32 mm 6-point socket wrench, loosen and remove the preload top cap (top of left
leg).
Knob Set-
ting(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
Setting Descrip-
tion
Tuning Tips
1
Soft Compression Maximum wheel traction and bumpcompliance. Too soft and you maybehave excessive brake dive and a wal-lowy feel.
8
(Factory set-ting)
Average Compres-sion
17
Firm Compression Resists brake dive and keeps the forkup in the travel. Too firm and you mayhave poor traction in loose conditions.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 179/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 40 RC2 Page 178
2. Remove the black spring spacers (4 spacers for 8 in./203 mm travel, 3 for 7.5 in./191 mmtravel, 2 for 7 in./178 mm travel, 1 for 6.5 in./165 mm travel, and 0 for 6 in./152 mmtravel).
3. Compress the fork slightly and remove the coil spring. You may need to firmly pull up onthe spring to disengage it from the plunger shaft.
4. Wipe the spring dry with a rag and check the color code.
5. Install the new spring by dropping it into the upper tube.
6. Install the appropriate spacers according to your desired travel, then torque the top capto 165 in-lbs (1864 N-cm).
7. Measure and set sag.
Changing TravelTravel on the 40 can be changed from 8 to 6 in 1/2 increments by rearranging the four internaltravel spacers inside the left leg of the fork. With the proper tools and oil, changing travel canbe done in about 15 minutes.
The following tools and supplies w ill be needed:• A 32 mm 6-point socket
• 10 mm open end wrench or socket
• torque wrench, plastic hammer
• oil drain pan
• clean dry lint-free towels
• measuring container, as well as the following:
1. The fork does not have to be removed from the bicycle for changing travel.
2. Place the bicycle (or fork, if removed) in a bike stand.
3. Using a 32 mm socket wrench, remove the left side topcap.
4. Remove the spacer(s) on top of the coil spring (4 spacers for 8, 3 spacers for 7.5, 2 spacersfor 7, 1 spacer for 6.5, 0 spacers for 6.2).
5. Using a 10 mm socket wrench, unscrew the left side bottom nut 6 turns.
6. Place a clean dry oil pan underneath the left side of the fork.
7. Tap on the bottom nut with a plastic faced hammer to disengage the plunger shaft fromthe lower leg.
8. Unscrew and remove the bottom nut and crush washer.
9. Push up on the shaft with a thin screwdriver and let the oil drain.
Quantity Part
Number
Part Name
1 025-03-004-A
1 qt. bottle of Fox Suspension Fluid(7 wt.)
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 180/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 40 RC2 Page 179
10.Compress the fork and pull the coil spring/plunger shaft assembly out of the top of the leftside upper tube.
11. Pull the coil spring off the plunger assembly.
12. Looking at the table below, determine the number of travel spacer(s) needed on the plung-er shaft for your desired travel.
13.Slide the black negative spring guide away from the flanged head of the aluminum plungershaft.
14. Push and snap on the correct number of the travel spacers to the plunger shaft and slideback the black negative spring guide against the spacers.
15. Push and snap on the coil spring to the plunger shaft assembly.
16. Install the coil spring/plunger shaft assembly into the top of the left side upper tube. Installthe correct number of spacers on top of the coil spring and thread the topcap into the up-per tube.
17.Remove the bicycle from bike stand and turn the bike upside down.
18.Using a thin screwdriver and sliding the lower leg up or down, push and align the plungershaft so that it is aligned and comes through the hole in the lower leg.
19.Once aligned, push the lower leg down and install the crush washer and bottom nut.
20.Using a 10 mm socket and torque wrench, torque the bottom nut to 50 in-lb (565 N-cm).
21.Turn the bike right side up and place it back into the bike stand.22.Remove the left side preload topcap and pour in 40 cc of FOX Suspension Fluid (7 wt.).
23. Install and torque the preload topcap to 165 in-lb (1864 N-cm).
24.After changing the travel, compress the fork a few times and check for proper operationbefore riding—there should be no free movement or play in travel. If there is free move-
Travel Spacer Settings
Travel Setting # of Spacers Un-der Topcap
# of Spacers onPlunger Shaft
8.0" (203 mm) 0
7.5" (190 mm) 1
7.0" (178 mm) 2
6.5" (165 mm) 3
3
2
1
0
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 181/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 40 RC2 Page 180
ment in the fork or if it makes strange noises, disassemble the fork and check that all fourspacers are in the fork and in the correct orientation for the desired travel.
25.Go ride.
Changing OilThe following tools and supplies will be needed: A 32 mm 6-point socket, 10 mm open endwrench or socket, 15 mm deep 6-point socket, torque wrench, 2 mm hex key wrench (RC2only), plastic hammer, small screwdriver, oil drain pan, clean dry lint-free towels, as well asthe following:
Oil change on the FOX 40 RC2 or R fork consists of changing the lower leg oil bath in each leg.This oil bath service can be performed with the common tools listed above, and the fork doesnot have to be removed from the bicycle. This service will not require any disassembly of theclosed RC2 or R cartridge.
Caut ion : Do no t a t t em pt t o d isassem ble th e FOX 40 RC2 or R Closed Car t r idg e
Sys tem . On ly FOX Racing Shox o r an Au t hor ized Serv ice Cent e r shou ld per f o rm such a p r ocedu r e .
1. Place the bicycle or fork in a stand.2. Remove the disc brake caliper from the lower leg and secure it to the handlebars or frame.
3. Using a 5 mm hex key wrench, loosen the four axle pinch bolts.
4. Using a 5 mm hex key wrench, unscrew the axle five full revolutions counterclockwise andremove from the lower leg.
5. Remove the front wheel from the bike.
6. Place a clean dry oil pan underneath the left side of the fork. Using a 10 mm open-endwrench or socket, loosen the bottom nut 6 full turns.
7. Tap on the bottom nut with a plastic faced hammer to disengage the plunger shaft fromthe lower leg.
8. Unscrew and remove the bottom nut and 8 mm crush washer. Pull the lower leg downwarduntil you feel it stop. Let the oil drain into the oil pan.
9. RC2 ONLY: Unscrew and remove the black protective cap. Using a 2 mm hex key wrench,unscrew the set-screw approximately two turns and remove the low-speed compressionadjuster knob. With a 2 mm hex key wrench, unscrew the set-screw approximately twoturns and remove the high-speed compression adjuster knob. The 1/8 diameter chrome
Quantity PartNumber
Part Name
1 025-03-004-A
1 qt. bottle of Fox Suspension Fluid(7 wt.)
1 241-01-002-C
8mm Crush washer
1 241-01-011 13mm Crush Washer
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 182/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 40 RC2 Page 181
steel detent ball and detent spring are in the machined hole in the high-speed compressionadjuster knob.
10.Using a 15 mm deep socket wrench, unscrew the bottom nut four turns. Place a clean dryoil pan underneath the right side of the fork.
11.Using a 15 mm deep socket on the bottom nut (to protect the adjusters), tap on the bot-tom nut with a plastic hammer to disengage the base stud from the lower leg.
12.Remove the bottom nut and 13 mm crush washer from the base stud and set them aside.
13. Push up on the base stud to let the oil bath oil drain out of the fork into the drain pan. If the oil looks black or a dark gray, flush both sides of the lower leg with clean oil.
14. To flush the lower leg, turn the fork upside-down and add about 20 cc of oil into each leg.If the fork is off the bike, you can move it around to get the clean oil all over the inside of the fork. Let the fork drain into the drain pan until it stops dripping.
15.Turn the bike or fork upside-down, pull up on the lower leg and add 40 cc of FOX Suspen-
sion Fluid (7 wt) into the right-side bottom hole (damper side) of the lower leg. Keepingthe lower leg in the up position, add 40 cc of FOX Suspension Fluid (7 wt) into the left-sidebottom hole (spring side) of the lower leg.
16.Slide the lower leg down until you can put on a NEW right-side 13 mm crush washer withthe old bottom nut. Thread on the bottom nut (2 to 3 turns max).
17.Using a 15 mm deep 6-point socket, torque the cartridge bottom nut to 50 in-lb.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 183/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 40 RC2 Page 182
18.Slide the lower leg down further so the plunger stud on the left side of the fork goesthrough the hole of the lower leg. You may need to use a thin screwdriver to move andalign the plunger shaft so that it goes through the hole of the lower leg.
19. Install a NEW left-side 8 mm crush washer with the old bottom nut. Thread on the bottomnut (2 to 3 turns max).
20.Using a 10 mm socket, torque the plunger bottom nut to 50 in-lb.
21.RC2 ONLY: Turn the bicycle right side up. Look at the two compression adjuster shafts onthe bottom of the right side damper. If you cannot find both flat spots, rotate the adjustershaft by lightly turning the shaft with needle nose pliers (see figure above). Using a 2 mmhex key wrench, align and install the RC2 high-speed compression adjuster knob so thatthe set screw tightens on the flat spot of the shaft. Be careful that the detent spring andchrome steel ball are in the top-side of the machined hole. Be careful not to over-torquethis knob because it will cause the knobs to bind. Now align and install the RC2 low-speedcompression adjuster knob so that the set screw tightens on the flat spot of the shaft. Thetorque for both compression knobs is 4 in-lb. Turn the knobs to make sure they turn freelyand install the black protective cap.
22.Wipe down the lower leg. Reinstall your disc brake caliper and torque fasteners to discbrake manufacturer’s specifications. Using a 5 mm hex key socket and torque wrench, re-
install the front wheel and thread in the axle and torque to 19 in-lb. Tighten the 2 left-sideaxle pinch bolts and torque to 19 in-lb. Compress the fork a few times to allow the rightside of the fork leg to settle into its low friction spot. Tighten the 2 right side axle pinchbolts and torque to 19 in-lb. Your oil change is complete. Now go ride!
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 184/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Dust Wiper Seal Quick Clean & Lube Page 183
Dust Wiper Seal Quick Clean & Lube
Tools Required
• Black Electrical Tape
• 10 mm socket hand driver tool (or 10 mm socket with extension)
• Small Flat Blade Screw Driver
• Shop Towels
• FOX 7 wt. Suspension Fluid
• 1 pillow pack of FLOAT Fluid
• Dish soap and water
Note : Be fo r e you sta r t m ake su r e th e ex te r i o r o f t h e fo r k i s cl ean and d r y and the a r ea a r ound t he dus t w ipe r sea l i s a l so ve r y c lean . You do no t w an t any
d i r t t o fa l l i n to t he fo r k du r i ng t he seal c l ean ing p r ocess .
1. Wrap the end of small flat blade screwdriver with black electrical tape. Very important thiswill help prevent scratches on upper tube in case the screw driver slips as you try to pushthe seal out.
2. The tip of screw driver should look like this, fully wrapped with tape:
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 185/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Dust Wiper Seal Quick Clean & Lube Page 184
3. Cut two four-inch (100 mm) strips of black electrical tape.
4. Place one strip of black tape above the dust wiper seal and directly above the little seallifter slot on the side of the dust wiper seal and place the other strip of tape on the oppositeside of seal and above a seal lifter slot.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 186/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Dust Wiper Seal Quick Clean & Lube Page 185
5. Insert tape covered tip of flat blade screw driver into seal lifter slot and push the seal upslowing about 3 mm. Be very careful. Move to opposite side and repeat. Keep working eachslot a little at a time until the seal pops up and out of dust wiper seal gland bore.
6. Push the seal up about two inches (50 mm). Place a shop towel under the seal. This willkeep dirt from getting into the fork during the cleaning process.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 187/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Dust Wiper Seal Quick Clean & Lube Page 186
7. Pour a small amount of suspension fluid on the seal and spin the seal clockwise slowly asyou push the seal up upwards. The edge of the two tape strips will remove small debrisfrom under the seal lips as you spin the seal by hand. Repeat as needed.
8. Using a shop towel clean off any excess oil and dirt from the upper tube. Push the dustwiper seal to the top past the end of the tape. Remove the two strips of tape from theupper tube. Clean the upper tube with soapy water to remove any residue adhesive film.Remove the shop towel that is covering the top of the lower leg.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 188/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Dust Wiper Seal Quick Clean & Lube Page 187
9. Pull the foam ring up that is placed in the seal gland bore. Be careful not to scratch uppertubes or tear the foam ring.
10.Clean the foam ring with suspension fluid and a clean shop towel. Repeat as necessaryuntil the foam ring is clean.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 189/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Dust Wiper Seal Quick Clean & Lube Page 188
11.Apply FLOAT Fluid to the foam ring 1/2 of a 5 cc pillow pack.
12. Push foam ring down into dust wiper seal gland bore
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 190/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Dust Wiper Seal Quick Clean & Lube Page 189
13.Slide dust wiper seal down into seal gland bore.
14. In most cases, you will be able to push the seal in all the way by hand.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 191/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Dust Wiper Seal Quick Clean & Lube Page 190
15. If you cannot push the seal in all the way by hand, use a 10 mm socket driver tool (or 10
mm socket with extension) and push the seal in as shown.
Note : Push i n a l i t t l e a t a t im e , m ov ing t he socke t a r oun d the edge to va r i ous
l ocat i ons as you push t he sea l i n to p lace .
Caut ion : Do no t push on the dus t w ipe r ou te r sea l l i p and ga r te r sp r i ng , o r dam- age to the sea l may r esu l t .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 192/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Dust Wiper Seal Quick Clean & Lube Page 191
16.The dust wiper seal is now flush with top of upper tube seal gland bore.
17.Repeat this dust wiper cleaning procedure on the other fork leg seal.
*END*
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 193/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Oil Volumes - Forks Page 192
Oil Volumes - Forks
2002-2009 Fork Oil Volume Sheet
Fork Model Oil Location Volume[mL]
2002-2006 F80 (R, RL, RLT & X dampers) FOX 7 wt. Damper 150.0
Spring-side OilBath
20.0
FOX FloatFluid
Air Chamber 5.0
2007-2008 F80 R (R damper) FOX 10 wt. Damper 150.0
FOX 7 wt. Spring-side OilBath
20.0
FOX FloatFluid
Air Chamber 5.0
2007-2008 F80 (RL, RLC & X dampers) FOX 7 wt. Damper 150.0
Spring-side OilBath
20.0
FOX FloatFluid
Air Chamber 5.0
2002-2006 F100 & F90 (R, RL, RLT & Xdampers)
FOX 7 wt. Damper 155.0
Spring-side OilBath
20.0
FOX FloatFluid
Air Chamber 5.0
2007-2008 F100 R (R damper) FOX 10 wt. Damper 155.0
FOX 7 wt. Spring-side OilBath
20.0
FOX FloatFluid
Air Chamber 5.0
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 194/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Oil Volumes - Forks Page 193
2007-2008 F100 & F90 (RL, RLC & X damp-ers)
FOX 7 wt. Damper 155.0
Spring-side OilBath
20.0
FOX Float
Fluid
Air Chamber 5.0
2008 F29 100 & 80 (RL, RLC dampers) FOX 7 wt. Damper 160.0
Spring-side OilBath
30.0
FOX FloatFluid
Air Chamber 5.0
2005-2006 Float 120, 130 & 140 (R, RL, RLCdampers)
FOX 7 wt. Damper 160.0
Spring-side OilBath
30.0
FOX FloatFluid
Air Chamber 5.0
2007-2008 F120, Float 130 & 140 R (Rdamper)
FOX 10 wt. Damper 160.0
FOX 7 wt. Spring-side OilBath
30.0
FOX FloatFluid
Air Chamber 5.0
2007-2008 F120, Float 130 & 140 (RL, RLC
dampers)
FOX 7 wt. Damper 160.0
Spring-side OilBath
30.0
FOX FloatFluid
Air Chamber 5.0
2006 Float 130 XTT (Trail-tune damper) FOX 7 wt. Damper 135.0
Spring-side OilBath
30.0
FOX FloatFluid
Air Chamber 5.0
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 195/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Oil Volumes - Forks Page 194
2003-2006 TALAS 125 & 130 (R, RL, RLCdampers)
FOX 7 wt. Damper 160.0
Spring-side OilBath
10.0
FOX Float
Fluid
IFP Chamber 3.0
Main Chamber 5.0
Neg Chamber 3.0
2006-2007 TALAS 130 XTT (Trail-tuneDamper)
FOX 7 wt. Damper 135.0
Spring-side OilBath
10.0
FOX FloatFluid
IFP Chamber 3.0
Main Chamber 5.0
Neg Chamber 3.0
2007-2008 TALAS 130 & 140 (R damper) FOX 10 wt. Damper 160.0
FOX 7 wt. Spring-side OilBath
10.0
FOX FloatFluid
IFP Chamber 3.0
Main Chamber 5.0
Neg Chamber 3.0
2007-2008 TALAS 130 & 140 (RL, RLC
dampers)
FOX 7 wt. Damper 160.0
Spring-side OilBath
10.0
FOX FloatFluid
IFP Chamber 3.0
Main Chamber 5.0
Neg Chamber 3.0
2009+ 32 mm TALAS III (R damper) FOX 10 wt. Damper 160.0
FOX 7 wt. Spring-side OilBath
10.0
FOX FloatFluid
Main Chamber 3.0
Neg Chamber 3.0
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 196/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Oil Volumes - Forks Page 195
2009+ 32 mm TALAS III (RL, RLC dampers) FOX 7 wt. Damper 160.0
Spring-side OilBath
10.0
FOX Float
Fluid
Main Chamber 3.0
Neg Chamber 3.0
2002-2006 Vanilla 100 & 130 (R, RL, RLCdampers)
FOX 7 wt. Damper 160.0
Spring-side OilBath
30.0
2007-2008 Vanilla 140 (R damper) FOX 10 wt. Damper 160.0
FOX 7 wt. Spring-side OilBath
30.0
2007-2008 Vanilla 140 (RL, RLC dampers) FOX 7 wt. Damper 160.0
Spring-side OilBath
30.0
2005-2006 36 TALAS (R and RC2 dampers) FOX 10 wt. Damper 100.0
FOX 7 wt. Damper-side OilBath
25.0
Spring-side OilBath
15.0
FOX FloatFluid
IFP Chamber 3.0
Main Chamber 3.0
Neg Chamber 3.0
2007-2008 36 TALAS (R and RC2 dampers) FOX 10 wt. Damper 100.0
FOX 7 wt. Damper-side OilBath
25.0
Spring-side OilBath
15.0
FOX Float
Fluid
IFP Chamber 3.0
Main Chamber 3.0
Neg Chamber 3.0
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 197/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Oil Volumes - Forks Page 196
2009+ 36 TALAS III (R and RC2 dampers) FOX 10 wt. Damper 100.0
FOX 7 wt. Damper-side OilBath
25.0
Spring-side Oil
Bath
15.0
FOX FloatFluid
Main Chamber 3.0
Neg Chamber 3.0
2007-2008 36 FLOAT 160 (R and RC2dampers)
FOX 10 wt. Damper 100.0
FOX 7 wt. Damper-side Oil
Bath
25.0
Spring-side OilBath
25.0
FOX FloatFluid
Air Chamber 5.0
2006-2008 36 VAN (R and RC2 dampers) FOX 10 wt. Damper 100.0
FOX 7 wt. Damper-side OilBath
25.0
Spring-side OilBath
25.0
2005-2008 40 (R and RC2 dampers) FOX 10 wt. Damper 122.0
FOX 7 wt. Damper-side OilBath
50.0
Spring-side OilBath
50.0
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 198/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 5.0 Page 197
DHX Air 5.0
Installing Your ShockIf you are installing your shock on a bike for which the shock is not original equipment:
1. Install the shock.
2. Remove the main air chamber air cap and let all the air out of the main air chamber.
3. Carefully cycle the suspension through its entire travel.
4. Check that all parts of the shock are clear of the frame and swingarm as it cycles through
the travel.
5. Pressurize your main air chamber to a minimum of 50 PSI and no more than 300 PSI. Youwill tune to a more specific air pressure in the Setting Sag section below.
6. Set sag.
weight 0.97 lbs. / 443 g(8.5" x 2.5" No reducers)
features/adjustments
position-sensitive Boost valve, adjustableProPedal 2-position dial or switch, adjustablebottom-out resistance, adjustable tuningrange via Schrader valve, adjustable airspring pressure, rebound adjust
spring air
intended use downhill, freeride, all-mountain, cross-coun-try
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 199/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 5.0 Page 198
General MaintenanceThere may be a small amount of air sleeve lubricant residue on the body. This is normal. If this residual air sleeve lubricant is not present, this is an indication that the air sleeve shouldbe re-lubricated. Some other things to consider for all shock models:
• If you ride in extreme conditions, service your shock and air sleeve more frequently.
See “Service Intervals” on page 303 to check the maintenance schedule for yourshock.
• Wash your shock with soap and water only.
• Do not use a high pressure washer to clean your shock.
• Extensive internal service should be performed by FOX Racing Shox or an AuthorizedService Center; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
Before You Ride
1. Clean the outside of your shock with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r shock .
2. Inspect entire exterior of shock for damage. The shock should not be used if any of theexterior parts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shoxfor further inspection and repair; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
3. Check that quick-release levers (or thru-axle pinch bolts) are properly adjusted and tight-ened.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo set sag on your DHX Air 5.0:
1. Measure sag (see “Measuring Sag” on page 246), and compare it to the recommended sagsetting shown in the Air Spring Setting Guidelines table below. Continue if the sag is notset to specification.
2. Locate the Schrader air valve on the shock and remove the air valve cap.
3. Screw the FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump onto the air valve until the pump showspressure on the gauge. Do not over-tighten; see “Using the FOX High Pressure Pump” onpage 316.
4. Add air pressure until desired pressure is shown on the gauge. Refer to the Air Spring Set-ting Guidelines table below for the proper sag setting.
5. Unthread the pump from the air valve and measure sag.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 200/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 5.0 Page 199
6. Repeat steps 2-5 until proper sag is achieved, then replace the air valve cap.
Adjusting ReboundRebound controls the rate at which your shock returns after it has been compressed. The prop-er rebound setting is a personal preference, and changes with rider weight, riding style and
conditions. A rule of thumb is that rebound should be as fast as possible without kicking backand pushing the rider off the saddle.
The rebound dial has approximately 22 clicks of adjustment.
For slower rebound, turn the red adjuster knob clockwise.
For faster rebound, turn the red adjuster knob counterclockwise.
ProPedal
Adjusting the ProPedal Dial
The ProPedal adjustment knob allows the rider to adjust the amount of ProPedal damping. Pro-Pedal damping affects the initial part of the compression stroke and is designed to control ped-
al-induced suspension bob. Since suspension designs vary, not all bicycles require the samedegree of ProPedal damping.
There are 15 clicks of adjustment:
For more ProPedal damping , rotate the ProPedal knob clockwise.
For lighter ProPedal damping, rotate the ProPedal knob (shown below) counterclockwise.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Shock Travel (in./ mm) Sag (in./ mm)
2.00/50.8 .50/12.7
2.25/57.2 .56/14.2
2.50/63.5 .62/15.7
3.00/76.2 .75/19.0
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 201/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 5.0 Page 200
Adjusting the ProPedal Switch
The ProPedal adjustment switch allows the rider to adjust the amount of ProPedal dampingusing a 2-position switch, which varies from FIRM to SOFT. ProPedal damping affects the initialpart of the compression stroke and is designed to control pedal-induced suspension bob.
The switch has two (2) positions:
For more ProPedal damping , rotate the ProPedal switch clockwise.
For lighter ProPedal damping , rotate the ProPedal switch (shown below) counterclockwise.
Bottom-Out ResistanceBottom-out resistance affects the final part of the compression stroke. The knob can be turnedwith a 4 mm hex key inserted into one of the holes around the perimeter. Do not use any othertool to turn the knob—a 4 mm (or 5/32) hex key only!
Turn the knob all the way clockwise for the most bottom-out resistance and counter-clockwisefor the least. There are three (3) rotations of adjustment and three (3) corresponding adjust-ment indicator lines on the reservoir.
For more bottom-out resistance, turn the knob clockwise.
For less bottom-out resistance, turn the knob counterclockwise.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 202/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 5.0 Page 201
Note : I f t h e k n o b f e e ls g r i t t y d u r i n g r o t a t i o n , se t t h e k n o b t o m a x i m u m v o l -
u m e ( f u l l y co u n t e r c lo ck w i se ) , an d t h e n u se a 2 m m ( o r 5 / 6 4 " ) h e x k e y t o l oosen t he se t s cr ew s i n the pe r im e te r ho les and r emove t he knob . Clean t he
knob t ho r ough ly . Ligh t l y g r ease , then r e - i ns ta l l t h e knob .
Boost ValveThe Boost Valve creates a position-sensitive damping scheme that allows for a seamless tran-sition from efficient ProPedal to square-edge bump absorption to a bottomless end-of-strokefeel. The Boost Valve also decouples the ProPedal and bottom-out adjustments, enabling Pro-Pedal platform adjustments to be made without affecting the changes made to the bottom-out adjustment.
The Boost Valve is not adjusted directly. Instead, its behavior and performance characteristicsare influenced by the air pressure setting in the reservoir and by adjusting the ProPedal knob.
To change the compression damping characteristics of your DHX Air 5.0 shock, attach a FOXHigh Pressure Pump to the air valve on the reservoir:
For a firmer ride, add 10 – 15 pounds of air pressure, to a maximum of 200 PSI.
For a softer ride, decrease the shock’s air pressure 10 – 15 pounds by using the pump’sbleed valve, to a minimum of 125 PSI.
Ride your bike and verify the settings before repeating the procedure.
Caut ion : N e v er r i d e y o u r b i k e w i t h m o r e t h a n 2 0 0 P SI o r l e ss t h a n 1 2 5 P SI i n t h e
r eser vo i r a i r cham ber . Doing so can damage you r shock and r equ i r e r epa i r s tha t a r e NOT cove r ed unde r w a r r an ty .
ProP edal + Boost Valve Interaction
Certain aspects of the Boost Valve can influence the ProPedal adjustment.
If the ProPedal adjustment knob is fully counterclockwise (lightest ProPedal damping position)
and the compression damping is still too strong, attach a shock pump to the Schrader valveon the reservoir and reduce the pressure 10 – 15 PSI. Repeat to achieve the desired compres-sion damping.
If there is not enough compression damping with the ProPedal knob fully clockwise, add 10 –15 PSI to the Boost Valve until desired compression damping is achieved.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 203/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 4.0 Page 202
DHX Air 4.0
Installing Your ShockIf you are installing your shock on a bike in which the shock is not original equipment:
1. Install the shock.
2. Remove the main air chamber air cap and let all the air out of the main air chamber.
3. Carefully cycle the suspension through its entire travel.
4. Check that all parts of the shock are clear of the frame and swingarm as it cycles throughthe travel.
5. Pressurize your main air chamber to a minimum of 50 PSI and no more than 300 PSI. Youwill tune to a more specific air pressure in the Setting Sag section below.
6. Set sag.
weight 0.94 lbs. / 429 g(8.5" x 2.5" No reducers)
features/adjustments
position-sensitive Boost valve, adjustableProPedal 2-position dial or switch, adjustabletuning range via Schrader valve, adjustableair spring pressure, rebound adjust
spring air
intended use downhill, freeride, all-mountain, cross-coun-try
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 204/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 4.0 Page 203
General MaintenanceThere may be a small amount of air sleeve lubricant residue on the body. This is normal. If this residual air sleeve lubricant is not present, this is an indication that the air sleeve shouldbe re-lubricated. Some other things to consider for all shock models:
• If you ride in extreme conditions, service your shock and air sleeve more frequently.
See “Service Intervals” on page 303 to check the maintenance schedule for yourshock.
• Wash your shock with soap and water only.
• Do not use a high pressure washer to clean your shock.
• Extensive internal service should be performed by FOX Racing Shox or an AuthorizedService Center; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
Before You Ride
1. Clean the outside of your shock with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r shock .
2. Inspect entire exterior of shock for damage. The shock should not be used if any of theexterior parts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox forfurther inspection and repair.
3. Check that quick-release levers (or thru-axle pinch bolts) are properly adjusted and tight-ened.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo set sag on your DHX Air 4.0:
1. Measure sag (see “Measuring Sag” on page 246), and compare it to the recommended sagsetting shown in the Air Spring Settings table below. Continue if the sag is not to specifi-cation.
2. Locate the Schrader air valve on the shock and remove the air valve cap.
3. Screw the FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump onto the air valve until the pump showspressure on the gauge. Do not over-tighten; see “Using the FOX High Pressure Pump” onpage 316.
4. Add air pressure until desired pressure is shown on the gauge. Refer to the Air Spring Set-tings table below for the proper sag setting.
5. Unthread the pump from the air valve and measure sag.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 205/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 4.0 Page 204
6. Repeat steps 2-5 until proper sag is achieved, then replace the air valve cap.
Adjusting ReboundRebound controls the rate at which your shock returns after it has been compressed. The prop-
er rebound setting is a personal preference, and changes with rider weight, riding style andconditions. A rule of thumb is that rebound should be as fast as possible without kicking backand pushing the rider off the saddle.
The rebound dial has approximately 22 clicks of adjustment.
For slower rebound, turn the red adjuster knob clockwise.
For faster rebound, turn the red adjuster knob counterclockwise.
ProPedal
Adjusting the ProPedal Dial
The ProPedal adjustment knob allows the rider to adjust the amount of ProPedal damping. Pro-Pedal damping affects the initial part of the compression stroke and is designed to control ped-al-induced suspension bob. Since suspension designs vary, not all bicycles require the samedegree of ProPedal damping.
There are 15 clicks of adjustment.
For lighter ProPedal damping, rotate the ProPedal knob (shown below) counterclockwise.
AIR SPRI NG SETTINGS
Shock Travel(in./ mm)
Recommended Sag(in./ mm)
2.00/50.8 .50/12.7
2.25/57.2 .56/14.2
2.50/63.5 .62/15.7
3.00/76.2 .75/19.0
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 206/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 4.0 Page 205
For increased ProP edal damping, rotate the ProPedal knob clockwise.
Adjusting the ProPedal Switch
The ProPedal adjustment switch allows the rider to adjust the amount of ProPedal dampingusing a 2-position switch, which varies from FIRM to SOFT. ProPedal damping affects the initialpart of the compression stroke and is designed to control pedal-induced suspension bob.
The switch has two (2) positions:
For more ProPedal damping , rotate the ProPedal switch clockwise.
For lighter ProPedal damping , rotate the ProPedal switch (shown below) counterclockwise.
Boost ValveThe Boost Valve creates a position-sensitive damping scheme that allows for a seamless tran-sition from efficient ProPedal to square-edge bump absorption to a bottomless end-of-strokefeel. The Boost Valve also decouples the ProPedal and the factory-set bottom-out resistance,enabling ProPedal adjustments to be made without affecting the compression damping curve.
The Boost Valve is not adjusted directly. Instead, its behavior and performance characteristicsare influenced by the air pressure setting in the reservoir and by adjusting the ProPedal knob.
To change the compression damping characteristics of your DHX Air 4.0 shock, attach a FOXHigh Pressure Pump to the air valve on the reservoir:
• For a firmer ride, add 10 – 15 pounds of air pressure, to a maximum of 200 PSI.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 207/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 4.0 Page 206
• For a softer ride, decrease the shock’s air pressure 10 – 15 pounds by using the pump’sbleed valve, to a minimum of 125 PSI.
Ride your bike and verify the settings before repeating the procedure.
Caut ion : N e v er r i d e y o u r b i k e w i t h m o r e t h a n 2 0 0 P SI o r l e ss t h a n 1 2 5 P SI i n t h e r eser vo i r a i r cham ber . Doing so can damage you r shock and r equ i r e r epa i r s tha t
a r e NOT cove r ed unde r w a r r an ty .
ProP edal + Boost Valve Interaction
Certain aspects of the Boost Valve can influence the ProPedal adjustment.
If the ProPedal adjustment knob is fully counterclockwise (lightest ProPedal damping position)and the compression damping is still too strong, attach a shock pump to the Schrader valveon the reservoir and reduce the pressure 10 – 15 PSI. Repeat to achieve the desired compres-sion damping.
If there is not enough compression damping with the ProPedal knob fully clockwise, add 10 –15 PSI to the Boost Valve until desired compression damping is achieved.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 208/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 3.0 Page 207
DHX Air 3.0
Installing Your ShockIf you are installing your shock on a bike in which the shock is not original equipment:
1. Install the shock.2. Remove the main air chamber air cap and let all the air out of the main air chamber.
3. Carefully cycle the suspension through its entire travel.
4. Check that all parts of the shock are clear of the frame and swingarm as it cycles throughthe travel.
weight 0.92 lbs. / 420 g(8.5" x 2.5" No reducers)
features/adjustments
position-sensitive Boost valve, factory-setProPedal, adjustable tuning range viaSchrader valve, adjustable air spring pres-
sure, rebound adjust
spring air
intended use downhill, freeride, all-mountain, cross-coun-try
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 209/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 3.0 Page 208
5. Pressurize your main air chamber to a minimum of 50 PSI and no more than 300 PSI. Youwill tune to a more specific air pressure in the Setting Sag section below.
6. Set sag.
General MaintenanceThere may be a small amount of air sleeve lubricant residue on the body. This is normal. If this residual air sleeve lubricant is not present, this is an indication that the air sleeve shouldbe re-lubricated. Some other things to consider for all shock models:
• If you ride in extreme conditions, service your shock and air sleeve more frequently.See “Service Intervals” on page 303 to check the maintenance schedule for yourshock.
• Wash your shock with soap and water only.
• Do not use a high pressure washer to clean your shock.
• Extensive internal service should be performed by FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized
Service Center; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
Before You Ride
1. Clean the outside of your shock with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r shock .
2. Inspect entire exterior of shock for damage. The shock should not be used if any of theexterior parts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shoxfor further inspection and repair.
3. Check that quick-release levers (or thru-axle pinch bolts) are properly adjusted and tight-ened.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo set sag on your DHX Air 3.0:
1. Measure sag (see “Measuring Sag” on page 246), and compare it to the recommended sagsetting shown in the Air Spring Settings table below. Continue if the sag is not to specifi-cation.
2. Locate the Schrader air valve on the shock and remove the air valve cap.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 210/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 3.0 Page 209
3. Screw the FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump onto the air valve until the pump showspressure on the gauge. Do not over-tighten; see “Using the FOX High Pressure Pump” onpage 316.
4. Add air pressure until desired pressure is shown on the gauge. Refer to the Air Spring Set-tings table below for the proper sag setting.
5. Unthread the pump from the air valve and measure sag.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 until proper sag is achieved, then replace the air valve cap.
Adjusting ReboundRebound controls the rate at which your shock returns after it has been compressed. The prop-er rebound setting is a personal preference, and changes with rider weight, riding style andconditions. A rule of thumb is that rebound should be as fast as possible without kicking backand pushing the rider off the saddle.
The rebound dial has approximately 22 clicks of adjustment.
For slower rebound, turn the red adjuster knob clockwise.
For faster rebound, turn the red adjuster knob counterclockwise.
ProPedalThe ProPedal on your DHX Air 3.0 is set at the factory, and cannot be adjusted.
Air Spring Settings
Shock Travel(in./ mm)
Recommended Sag(in./ mm)
2.00/50.8 .50/12.7
2.25/57.2 .56/14.2
2.50/63.5 .62/15.7
3.00/76.2 .75/19.0
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 211/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX Air 3.0 Page 210
Boost ValveThe Boost Valve creates a position-sensitive damping scheme that allows for a seamless tran-sition from efficient ProPedal to square-edge bump absorption to a bottomless end-of-strokefeel. The Boost Valve also decouples the factory-set ProPedal and factory-set bottom-out re-sistance without affecting the compression damping curve.
The Boost Valve is not adjusted directly. Instead, its behavior and performance characteristicsare influenced by the air pressure setting in the reservoir.
To change the compression damping characteristics of your DHX Air 3.0 shock, attach a FOXHigh Pressure Pump to the air valve on the reservoir:
For a firmer ride, add 10 – 15 pounds of air pressure, to a maximum of 200 PSI.
For a softer ride, decrease the shock’s air pressure 10 – 15 pounds by using the pump’sbleed valve, to a minimum of 125 PSI.
Ride your bike and verify the settings before repeating the procedure.
Caut ion : N e v er r i d e y o u r b i k e w i t h m o r e t h a n 2 0 0 P SI o r l e ss t h a n 1 2 5 P SI i n t h e
r eser vo i r a i r cham ber . Doing so can damage you r shock and r equ i r e r epa i r s tha t
a r e NOT cove r ed unde r w a r r an ty .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 212/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 5.0 Page 211
DHX 5.0
Installing Your Shock
If you are installing your shock on a bike of w hich the shock is not original equip-ment:
1. Install the shock with the spring retainer, but without the spring.
2. Carefully cycle the suspension through its entire travel.
3. Check that all parts of the shock are clear of the frame and swingarm as it cycles throughthe travel.
4. Properly place the spring back onto the shock.
5. Set sag.
weight 0.82 lbs. / 375g(8.75" x 2.75" No reducers or spring)
features/ adjustments position-sensitive Boost valve, adjustableProPedal, adjustable bottom-out resist-ance, adjustable tuning range via Schradervalve, coil spring preload, rebound adjust
spring coil
intended use downhill, freeride, all-mountain
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 213/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 5.0 Page 212
General Maintenance
Some things to consider:
• If you ride in extreme conditions, service your shock more frequently. See “ServiceIntervals” on page 303 to check the maintenance schedule for your shock.
• Wash your shock with soap and water only.
• Do not use a high pressure washer to clean your shock.
• Extensive internal service should be performed by FOX Racing Shox or an AuthorizedService Center; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
Before You Ride
1. Clean the outside of your shock with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r shock .
2. Inspect entire exterior of shock for damage. The shock should not be used if any of theexterior parts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox forfurther inspection and repair.
3. Check that quick-release levers (or thru-axle pinch bolts) are properly adjusted and tight-ened.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting Sag
To set sag on your DHX 5.0:
1. Measure sag (see “Measuring Sag” on page 246), and compare it to the recommended sagsetting shown in the Coil Spring Setting Guidelines table below. Continue with this proce-dure if the sag is not to specification.
2. Adjust the preload ring accordingly:
If sag is lower than specified in the table, turn the preload ring counterclockwise. Al-
ways ensure that the spring is secure and does not freely move.
Note : Af te r t he p r e load r i ng engages the sp r i ng , t u r n t he p r e load r i ng c lock -
w i s e one tu r n . I f t he p r e load r i ng needs to be tu r ned coun t e r c lockw ise f r om
th i s po in t t o ach ieve p r ope r sag , you w i l l need to ob t a in a l ow e r r a te sp r i ng .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 214/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 5.0 Page 213
If sag is higher than specified in the table, turn the preload ring clockwise no morethan full two turns after the preload ring engages the spring.
Note : I f a f t e r t h e p r e l o ad r i n g e n g a g es t h e sp r i n g a n d m o r e t h a n t w o f u l l
c l ockw ise tu r ns a r e needed to ach ieve p r ope r sag , you w i l l need to ob ta in a
h ighe r r a te sp r i ng .
3. If necessary, contact FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized Service Center to obtain a higheror lower rated spring.
Changing Springs
1. Loosen the preload ring until the spring freely moves.
2. Lift up the spring and remove the spring retainer.
3. Slide the spring off the shock body. Depending on your bike model, you may need to re-
move the reducers to remove the spring.
4. Orient the new spring correctly (see Spring Orientation below) and slide it onto theshock body.
5. Place the spring retainer back on the shock and under the spring ensuring that the openslot on the spring retainer rests on the flat part of the spring end.
6. Tighten the preload ring just until the spring no longer moves.
7. Turn the preload ring one additional full turn.
Spring Orientation
When placing the spring back on the shock body, it is important that the spring is correctlyoriented. Essentially, the space in the spring retainer should rest on the flat part of the spring,and not on the segment of the spring where it starts to coil back under itself. Rotate the springor spring retainer until the correct orientation is achieved.
An improperly oriented spring can fail prematurely, causing loss of control of the bicycle, whichcan result in serious or fatal injuries. The pictures below demonstrate correct and incorrectspring orientation. Correct spring orientation applies to all FOX Racing Shox rear shocks thatutilize coil springs:
Coil Spring Setting Guidelines
Shock Travel(in./ mm)
Recommended Sag(in./ mm)
2.00/50.8 .50/12.7
2.25/57.1 .56/14.2
2.50/63.5 .62/15.7
2.75/69.8 .69/17.5
3.00/76.2 .75/19.0
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 215/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 5.0 Page 214
Reading Your Spring Rate
Adjusting ReboundRebound controls the rate at which your shock returns after it has been compressed. The prop-er rebound setting is a personal preference, and changes with rider weight, riding style andconditions. A rule of thumb is that rebound should be as fast as possible without kicking backand pushing the rider off the saddle.
The rebound knob has approximately 15 clicks of adjustment.
For slower rebound, turn the red adjuster knob clockwise.
For faster rebound, turn the red adjuster knob counterclockwise.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 216/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 5.0 Page 215
ProPedalThe ProPedal adjustment knob allows the rider to adjust the amount of ProPedal damping. Pro-Pedal damping affects the initial part of the compression stroke and is designed to control ped-al-induced suspension bob. Since suspension designs vary, not all bicycles require the same
degree of ProPedal damping.There are 15 clicks of adjustment.
For lighter ProPedal damping, rotate the ProPedal knob counterclockwise.
For increased ProP edal damping, rotate the ProPedal knob clockwise.
Bottom-Out ResistanceBottom-out resistance affects the final part of the compression stroke. The knob can be turnedwith a 4 mm hex key inserted into one of the holes around the perimeter. Do not use any othertool to turn the knob—a 4 mm (or 5/32) hex key only!
Turn the knob all the way clockwise for the most bottom-out resistance and counter-clockwise
for the least. There are three (3) rotations of adjustment and three (3) corresponding adjust-ment indicator lines on the reservoir.
For more bottom-out resistance, turn the knob clockwise.
For less bottom-out resistance, turn the knob counterclockwise.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 217/322
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 218/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 4.0 Page 217
DHX 4.0
Installing Your Shock
If you are installing your shock on a bike in which the shock is not original equipment:
1. Install the shock with the spring retainer, but without the spring.
2. Carefully cycle the suspension through its entire travel.
3. Check that all parts of the shock are clear of the frame and swingarm as it cycles throughthe travel.
4. Properly place the spring back onto the shock.
5. Set sag.
weight 0.80 lbs. / 367 g(8.75" x 2.75" No reducers or spring)
features/ adjustments position-sensitive Boost valve, adjustableProPedal, adjustable tuning range viaSchrader valve, coil spring preload, reboundadjust
spring coil
intended use downhill, freeride, all-mountain
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 219/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 4.0 Page 218
General MaintenanceSome things to consider:
• If you ride in extreme conditions, service your shock more frequently. See “ServiceIntervals” on page 303 to check the maintenance schedule for your shock.
• Wash your shock with soap and water only.• Do not use a high pressure washer to clean your shock.
• Extensive internal service should be performed by FOX Racing Shox or an AuthorizedService Center; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
Before You Ride
1. Clean the outside of your shock with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r shock .
2. Inspect entire exterior of shock for damage. The shock should not be used if any of theexterior parts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shoxfor further inspection and repair.
3. Check that quick-release levers (or thru-axle pinch bolts) are properly adjusted and tight-ened.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting Sag
To set sag on your DHX 4.0:
1. Measure sag (see “Measuring Sag” on page 246), and compare it to the recommended sagsetting shown in the Coil Spring Setting Guidelines table below. Continue if the sag is notto specification.
2. Adjust the preload ring accordingly:
If sag is low er than on the table, turn the preload ring counterclockwise. Always ensurethat the spring is secure and does not freely move.
Note : Af te r t he p r e load r i ng engages the sp r i ng , t u r n t he p r e load r i ng c lock -
w i se one tu r n . I f t he p r e load r i ng needs to be tu r ned coun t e r c lockw ise f r om th i s po in t t o ach ieve p r ope r sag , you w i l l need to ob t a in a l ow e r r a te sp r i ng .
If sag is higher than on the table, turn the preload ring clockwise no more than full twoturns after the preload ring engages the spring.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 220/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 4.0 Page 219
Note : I f a f t e r t h e p r e l o ad r i n g e n g a g es t h e sp r i n g a n d m o r e t h a n t w o f u l l
c l ockw ise tu r ns a r e needed to ach ieve p r ope r sag , you w i l l need to ob ta in a h ighe r r a te sp r i ng .
3. If necessary, contact FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized Service Center to obtain a higheror lower-rated spring.
Changing Springs
1. Loosen the preload ring until the spring freely moves.
2. Lift up the spring and remove the spring retainer.
3. Slide the spring off the shock body. Depending on your bike model, you may need to re-move the reducers to remove the spring.
4. Orient the new spring correctly (see Spring Orientation below) and slide it onto the
shock body.5. Place the spring retainer back on the shock and under the spring ensuring that the open
slot on the spring retainer rests on the flat part of the spring end.
6. Tighten the preload ring just until the spring no longer moves.
7. Turn the preload ring one additional full turn.
Spring Orientation
When placing the spring back on the shock body, it is important that the spring is correctlyoriented. Essentially, the space in the spring retainer should rest on the flat part of the spring,and not on the segment of the spring where it starts to coil back under itself. Rotate the springor spring retainer until the correct orientation is achieved.
An improperly oriented spring can fail prematurely, causing loss of control of the bicycle, whichcan result in serious or fatal injuries. The pictures below demonstrate correct and incorrectspring orientation. Correct spring orientation applies to all FOX Racing Shox rear shocks thatutilize coil springs:
Coil Spring Setting Guidelines
Shock Travel(in./ mm)
Recommended Sag(in./ mm)
2.00/50.8 .50/12.7
2.25/57.1 .56/14.2
2.50/63.5 .62/15.7
2.75/69.8 .69/17.5
3.00/76.2 .75/19.0
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 221/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 4.0 Page 220
Reading Your Spring Rate
Adjusting ReboundRebound controls the rate at which your shock returns after it has been compressed. The prop-er rebound setting is a personal preference, and changes with rider weight, riding style andconditions. A rule of thumb is that rebound should be as fast as possible without kicking backand pushing the rider off the saddle.
The rebound knob has approximately 15 clicks of adjustment.
For slower rebound, turn the red adjuster knob clockwise.
For faster rebound, turn the red adjuster knob counterclockwise.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 222/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 4.0 Page 221
ProPedalThe ProPedal adjustment knob allows the rider to adjust the amount of ProPedal damping. Pro-Pedal damping affects the initial part of the compression stroke and is designed to control ped-al-induced suspension bob. Since suspension designs vary, not all bicycles require the same
degree of ProPedal damping.There are 15 clicks of adjustment.
For lighter ProPedal damping, rotate the ProPedal knob counterclockwise.
For increased ProP edal damping, rotate the ProPedal knob clockwise.
Boost ValveThe Boost Valve creates a position-sensitive damping scheme that allows for a seamless tran-sition from efficient ProPedal to square-edge bump absorption to a bottomless end-of-strokefeel. The Boost Valve also decouples the ProPedal and the factory-set bottom-out resistance,enabling ProPedal adjustments to be made without affecting the compression damping curve.
The Boost Valve is not adjusted directly. Instead, its behavior and performance characteristicsare influenced by the air pressure setting in the reservoir and by adjusting the ProPedal knob.
To change the compression damping characteristics of your DHX 4.0 shock, attach a FOX HighPressure Pump to the air valve on the reservoir:
For a firmer ride, add 10 – 15 pounds of air pressure, to a maximum of 200 PSI.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 223/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 4.0 Page 222
For a softer ride, decrease the shock’s air pressure 10 – 15 pounds by using the pump’sbleed valve, to a minimum of 125 PSI.
Ride your bike and verify the settings before repeating the procedure.
Caut ion : N e v er r i d e y o u r b i k e w i t h m o r e t h a n 2 0 0 P SI o r l e ss t h a n 1 2 5 P SI i n t h e r eser vo i r a i r cham ber . Doing so can damage you r shock and r equ i r e r epa i r s tha t
a r e NOT cove r ed unde r w a r r an ty .
ProP edal + Boost Valve Interaction
Certain aspects of the Boost Valve can influence the ProPedal adjustment.
If the ProPedal adjustment knob is fully counterclockwise (lightest ProPedal damping position)and the compression damping is still too strong, attach a shock pump to the Schrader valveon the reservoir and reduce the pressure 10 – 15 PSI. Repeat to achieve the desired compres-sion damping.
If there is not enough compression damping with the ProPedal knob fully clockwise, add 10 –15 PSI to the Boost Valve until desired compression damping is achieved.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 224/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 3.0 Page 223
DHX 3.0
Installing Your ShockIf you are installing your shock on a bike in which the shock is not original equipment:
1. Install the shock with the spring retainer, but without the spring.
2. Carefully cycle the suspension through its entire travel.
3. Check that all parts of the shock are clear of the frame and swingarm as it cycles throughthe travel.
4. Properly place the spring back onto the shock.
5. Set sag.
weight 0.79 lbs. / 358 g(8.75" x 2.75" No reducers or spring)
features/ adjustments position-sensitive Boost valve, ProPedal (factory-set), adjustable tuning range viaSchrader valve, coil spring preload, reboundadjust
spring coil
intended use downhill, freeride, all-mountain
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 225/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 3.0 Page 224
General Maintenance
Some things to consider:
• If you ride in extreme conditions, service your shock more frequently. See “ServiceIntervals” on page 303 to check the maintenance schedule for your shock.
• Wash your shock with soap and water only.
• Do not use a high pressure washer to clean your shock.
• Extensive internal service should be performed by FOX Racing Shox or an AuthorizedService Center; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
Before You Ride
1. Clean the outside of your shock with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r shock .
2. Inspect entire exterior of shock for damage. The shock should not be used if any of theexterior parts appear to be damaged. Please contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shoxfor further inspection and repair.
3. Check that quick-release levers (or thru-axle pinch bolts) are properly adjusted and tight-ened.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting Sag
To set sag on your DHX 3.0:
1. Measure sag (see “Measuring Sag” on page 246), and compare it to the recommended sagsetting shown in the Coil Spring Setting Guidelines table below. Continue if the sag is notto specification.
2. Adjust the preload ring accordingly:
If sag is lower than specified in the table, turn the preload ring counterclockwise. Al-
ways ensure that the spring is secure and does not freely move.
Note : Af te r t he p r e load r i ng engages the sp r i ng , t u r n t he p r e load r i ng c lock -
w i se one tu r n . I f t he p r e load r i ng needs to be tu r ned coun t e r c lockw ise f r om
th i s po in t t o ach ieve p r ope r sag , you w i l l need to ob t a in a l ow e r r a te sp r i ng .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 226/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 3.0 Page 225
If sag is higher than specified in the table, turn the preload ring clockwise no morethan full two turns after the preload ring engages the spring.
Note : I f a f t e r t h e p r e l o ad r i n g e n g a g es t h e sp r i n g a n d m o r e t h a n t w o f u l l
c l ockw ise tu r ns a r e needed to ach ieve p r ope r sag , you w i l l need to ob ta in a
h ighe r r a te sp r i ng .
3. If necessary, contact FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized Service Center to obtain a higheror lower-rated spring.
Changing Springs
1. Loosen the preload ring until the spring freely moves.
2. Lift up the spring and remove the spring retainer.
3. Slide the spring off the shock body. Depending on your bike model, you may need to re-move the reducers to remove the spring.
4. Orient the new spring correctly (see Spring Orientation below) and slide it onto theshock body.
5. Place the spring retainer back on the shock and under the spring ensuring that the openslot on the spring retainer rests on the flat part of the spring end.
6. Tighten the preload ring just until the spring no longer moves.
7. Turn the preload ring one additional full turn.
Spring Orientation
When placing the spring back on the shock body, it is important that the spring is correctlyoriented. Essentially, the space in the spring retainer should rest on the flat part of the spring,and not on the segment of the spring where it starts to coil back under itself. Rotate the springor spring retainer until the correct orientation is achieved.
An improperly oriented spring can fail prematurely, causing loss of control of the bicycle, whichcan result in serious or fatal injuries. The pictures below demonstrate correct and incorrect
Coil Spring Setting Guidelines
Shock Travel(in./ mm)
Recommended Sag(in./ mm)
(25% of travel)
2.00/50.8 .50/12.7
2.25/57.1 .56/14.2
2.50/63.5 .62/15.7
2.75/69.8 .69/17.5
3.00/76.2 .75/19.0
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 227/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 3.0 Page 226
spring orientation. Correct spring orientation applies to all FOX Racing Shox rear shocks thatutilize coil springs:
Reading Your Spring Rate
Adjusting ReboundRebound controls the rate at which your shock returns after it has been compressed. The prop-er rebound setting is a personal preference, and changes with rider weight, riding style andconditions. A rule of thumb is that rebound should be as fast as possible without kicking backand pushing the rider off the saddle.
The rebound knob has approximately 15 clicks of adjustment.
For slower rebound, turn the red adjuster knob clockwise.
For faster rebound, turn the red adjuster knob counterclockwise.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 228/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual DHX 3.0 Page 227
ProPedalThe ProPedal on your DHX 3.0 is set at the factory, and cannot be adjusted.
Boost ValveThe Boost Valve creates a position-sensitive damping scheme that allows for a seamless tran-sition from efficient ProPedal to square-edge bump absorption to a bottomless end-of-strokefeel. The Boost Valve also decouples the ProPedal and bottom-out adjustments, enabling Pro-Pedal platform adjustments to be made without affecting the changes made to the bottom-out adjustment.
The Boost Valve is not adjusted directly. Instead, its behavior and performance characteristicsare influenced by the air pressure setting in the reservoir.
To change the compression damping characteristics of your DHX 3.0 shock, attach a FOX HighPressure Pump to the air valve on the reservoir:
For a firmer ride, add 10 – 15 pounds of air pressure, to a maximum of 200 PSI.
For a softer ride, decrease the shock’s air pressure 10 – 15 pounds by using the pump’sbleed valve, to a minimum of 125 PSI.
Ride your bike and verify the settings before repeating the procedure.
Caut ion : N e v er r i d e y o u r b i k e w i t h m o r e t h a n 2 0 0 P SI o r l e ss t h a n 1 2 5 P SI i n t h e
r eser vo i r a i r cham ber . Doing so can damage you r shock and r equ i r e r epa i r s tha t a r e NOT cove r ed unde r w a r r an ty .
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 229/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual VAN R Page 228
VAN R
Installing Your ShockIf you are installing your shock on a bike in which the shock is not original equipment:
1. Install the shock with the spring retainer, but without the spring.
2. Carefully cycle the suspension through its entire travel.
3. Check that all parts of the shock are clear of the frame and swingarm as it cycles throughthe travel.
4. Properly place the spring back onto the shock.
5. Set sag.
weight 0.74 lbs. / 339 g(8.75" x 2.75" No reducers or spring)
features/ adjustments factory-set ProPedal, coil spring preload,speed-sensitive compression damping, re-bound adjust
spring coil
intended use downhill, freeride, all-mountain
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 230/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual VAN R Page 229
General MaintenanceSome things to consider:
• If you ride in extreme conditions, service your shock more frequently. See “ServiceIntervals” on page 303 to check the maintenance schedule for your shock.
• Wash your shock with soap and water only.
• Do not use a high pressure washer to clean your shock.
• Internal service should be performed by FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized ServiceCenter; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
Before You Ride
1. Clean the outside of your shock with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r shock .
2. Inspect entire exterior of shock for damage. The shock should not be used if any of theexterior parts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox forfurther inspection and repair.
3. Check that quick-release levers (or thru-axle pinch bolts) are properly adjusted and tight-ened.
4. Check headset adjustment. Adjust headset if loose, according to manufacturer’s recom-mendations.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo set sag on your VAN R:
1. Measure sag (see “Measuring Sag” on page 246), and compare it to the recommended sagsetting shown in the Coil Spring Settings table below. Continue if the sag is not to specifi-cation.
2. Adjust the preload ring accordingly:
If sag is lower than specified in the table, turn the preload ring counterclockwise. Al-ways ensure that the spring is secure and does not freely move.
Note : Af te r t he p r e load r i ng engages the sp r i ng , t u r n t he p r e load r i ng c lock - w i se one tu r n . I f t he p r e load r i ng needs to be tu r ned coun t e r c lockw ise f r om
th i s po in t t o ach ieve p r ope r sag , you w i l l need to ob t a in a l ow e r r a te sp r i ng .
If sag is higher than specified in the table, turn the preload ring clockwise no morethan full two turns after the preload ring engages the spring.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 231/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual VAN R Page 230
Note : I f a f t e r t h e p r e l o ad r i n g e n g a g es t h e sp r i n g a n d m o r e t h a n t w o f u l l
c l ockw ise tu r ns a r e needed to ach ieve p r ope r sag , you w i l l need to ob ta in a h ighe r r a te sp r i ng .
3. If necessary, contact FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized Service Center to obtain a higheror lower rated spring.
Changing Springs
1. Loosen the preload ring until the spring freely moves.
2. Lift up the spring and remove the spring retainer.
3. Slide the spring off the shock body. Depending on your bike model, you may need to re-move the reducers to remove the spring.
4. Orient the new spring correctly (see Spring Orientation below) and slide it onto theshock body.
5. Place the spring retainer back on the shock and under the spring ensuring that the openslot on the spring retainer rests on the flat part of the spring end.
6. Tighten the preload ring just until the spring no longer moves.
7. Turn the preload ring one additional full turn.
Spring Orientation
When placing the spring back on the shock body, it is important that the spring is correctlyoriented. Essentially, the space in the spring retainer should rest on the flat part of the spring,and not on the segment of the spring where it starts to coil back under itself. Rotate the springor spring retainer until the correct orientation is achieved.
W a r n i n g ! An imp r ope r l y o r i en ted sp r i ng can fa i l p r ema tu r e l y , caus ing l oss o f
con t r o l o f t he b i cycle , wh ich can r esu l t i n se r i ous o r fa ta l i n j u r i es.
Coil Spring Settings
Shock Travel(in./ mm)
Recommended Sag(in./ mm)
1.5038.1 .38/9.5
2.00/50.8 .50/12.7
2.25/57.1 .56/14.2
2.5063.5 .62/15.7
2.75/69.8 .69/17.5
3.00/76.2 .75/19.0
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 232/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual VAN R Page 231
The pictures below demonstrate correct and incorrect spring orientation. Correct spring orien-tation applies to all FOX Racing Shox rear shocks that utilize coil springs:
Reading Your Spring Rate
Adjusting ReboundRebound controls the rate at which your shock returns after it has been compressed. The prop-er rebound setting is a personal preference, and changes with rider weight, riding style andconditions. A rule of thumb is that rebound should be as fast as possible without kicking backand pushing the rider off the saddle.
The rebound knob has approximately 15 clicks of adjustment.
For slower rebound, turn the red adjuster knob clockwise.For faster rebound, turn the red adjuster knob counterclockwise.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 233/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual VAN R Page 232
ProPedalThe ProPedal on your VAN R is set at the factory, and cannot be adjusted.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 234/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RP23 Page 233
FLOAT RP23
Installing Your ShockIf you are installing your shock on a bike in which the shock is not original equipment:
1. Install the shock.
2. Remove the main air chamber air cap and let all the air out of the main air chamber.
3. Carefully cycle the suspension through its entire travel.
4. Check that all parts of the shock are clear of the frame and swingarm as it cycles throughthe travel.
5. Pressurize your main air chamber to a minimum of 50 PSI and no more than 300 PSI. Youwill tune to a more specific air pressure in the Setting Sag section below.
6. Set sag.
weight 0.47 lbs. / 213 g(6.50" x 1.50" No reducers)
features/ adjustments high volume standard air sleeve, lightweightchassis, ProPedal with 3 positions, ProPedaladjust with 3 FIRM positions, air spring pres-sure, rebound adjust
spring air
intended use freeride, all-mountain, cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 235/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RP23 Page 234
General MaintenanceThere may be a small amount of air sleeve lubricant residue on the body. This is normal. If this residual air sleeve lubricant is not present, this is an indication that the air sleeve shouldbe re-lubricated. Some other things to consider for all shock models:
• If you ride in extreme conditions, service your shock and air sleeve more frequently.
See “Service Intervals” on page 303 to check the maintenance schedule for yourshock.
• Wash your shock with soap and water only.
• Do not use a high pressure washer to clean your shock.
• Internal service should be performed by FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized ServiceCenter; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
Before You Ride
1. Clean the outside of your shock with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r shock .
2. Inspect entire exterior of shock for damage. The shock should not be used if any of theexterior parts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox forfurther inspection and repair.
3. Check that quick-release levers (or thru-axle pinch bolts) are properly adjusted and tight-ened.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo set sag:
1. Measure sag (see “Measuring Sag” on page 246), and compare it to the recommended sagsetting shown in the Air Spring Setting Guidelines table below. Continue if the sag is notset to specification.
2. Locate the Schrader air valve on the shock and remove the air valve cap.
3. Screw the FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump onto the air valve until the pump showspressure on the gauge. Do not over-tighten; see “Using the FOX High Pressure Pump” onpage 316.
4. Add air pressure until desired pressure is shown on the gauge. Refer to the Air Spring Set-ting Guidelines table below for the proper sag setting.
5. Unthread the pump from the air valve and measure sag.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 236/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RP23 Page 235
6. Repeat steps 2-5 until proper sag is achieved, then replace the air valve cap.
Adjusting ReboundRebound controls the rate at which your shock returns after it has been compressed. The prop-er rebound setting is a personal preference, and changes with rider weight, riding style andconditions. A rule of thumb is that rebound should be as fast as possible without kicking backand pushing the rider off the saddle.
The rebound knob has 8-10 clicks of adjustment.
For slower rebound, turn the red adjuster knob clockwise.
For faster rebound, turn the red adjuster knob counterclockwise.
ProPedal
ProPedal Lever
The ProPedal lever allows for on-the-fly ProPedal adjustment. ProPedal damping reduces ped-al-induced suspension bob. The two ProPedal lever settings are:
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Shock Travel(in./ mm)
Sag(in./ mm)
1.00/25.4 .25/6.4
1.25/31.7 .31/7.9
1.50/38.1 .38/9.5
1.75/44.4 .44/11.1
2.00/50.8 .50/12.7
2.25/57.1 .56/14.2
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 237/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RP23 Page 236
• OPEN
• PROPEDAL
Use each setting to adjust the shock for different riding conditions and situations. For example,use PROPEDAL for riding to the top of the mountain, and then switch to OPEN for the de-scent.
To determine which ProPedal position is better for your condition and situation, pedal the bi-cycle and monitor the shock movement. Switch between positions and select the one that re-duces suspension movement most effectively while providing the desired amount of bumpabsorption.
Because suspension designs and riding skills vary, optimal settings can vary from bike to bikeand rider to rider. For more precise ProPedal tuning and to further eliminate pedal-inducedbob while maintaining bump compliance, adjust the ProPedal knob. As with the ProPedal lever,switch positions and select a setting that reduces suspension movement most effectively whileproviding the desired amount of bump absorption.
ProPedal Knob
The 3-position ProPedal knob (shown below) allows you to adjust ProPedal firmness when theProPedal lever is in the PROPEDAL position. The ProPedal knob only changes damping whenthe ProPedal lever is in the PROPEDAL position.
The ProPedal knob settings are denoted by the numbers etched onto the ProPedal knob. Thethree ProPedal knob settings are:
• (1) PROPEDAL Light
• (2) PROPEDAL Medium
• (3) PROPEDAL Firm
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 238/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RP23 Page 237
To adjust the ProPedal knob:
1. Turn the ProPedal lever to the PROPEDAL position, as shown in graphic above.
2. Lift the ProPedal knob (see frame #2 in the drawing below).
3. Turn the ProPedal knob clockwise (relative to the ProPedal knob facing the user) until theselection you want—1, 2, or 3—is aligned with the ProPedal lever (#3). The ProPedal knobclicks twice per setting as it turns. The first click occurs as you exit the current setting; thesecond click as you engage the new setting.
4. Push the ProPedal knob into its new position (#4). The ProPedal knob should NOT be ad- justed on-the-fly. It should only be adjusted while in a stationary position.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 239/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RP2 Page 238
FLOAT RP2
Installing Your ShockIf you are installing your shock on a bike in which the shock is not original equipment:
1. Install the shock.
2. Remove the main air chamber air cap and let all the air out of the main air chamber.
3. Carefully cycle the suspension through its entire travel.4. Check that all parts of the shock are clear of the frame and swingarm as it cycles through
the travel.
5. Pressurize your main air chamber to a minimum of 50 PSI and no more than 300 PSI. Youwill tune to a more specific air pressure in the Setting Sag section below.
6. Set sag.
weight 0.45 lbs. / 205 g(6.50" x 1.50" No reducers)
features/adjustments
high volume standard air sleeve, lightweightchassis, ProPedal with 2 positions, air springpressure, rebound adjust
spring air
intended use freeride, all-mountain, cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 240/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RP2 Page 239
General MaintenanceThere may be a small amount of air sleeve lubricant residue on the body. This is normal. If this residual air sleeve lubricant is not present, this is an indication that the air sleeve shouldbe re-lubricated. Some other things to consider for all shock models:
• If you ride in extreme conditions, service your shock and air sleeve more frequently.
See “Service Intervals” on page 303 to check the maintenance schedule for yourshock.
• Wash your shock with soap and water only.
• Do not use a high pressure washer to clean your shock.
• Internal service should be performed by FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized ServiceCenter; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
Before You Ride
1. Clean the outside of your shock with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r shock .
2. Inspect entire exterior of shock for damage. The shock should not be used if any of theexterior parts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox forfurther inspection and repair.
3. Check that quick-release levers (or thru-axle pinch bolts) are properly adjusted and tight-ened.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo set sag:
1. Measure sag (see “Measuring Sag” on page 246), and compare it to the recommended sagsetting shown in the Air Spring Setting Guidelines table below. Continue if the sag is notto specification.
2. Locate the Schrader air valve on the shock and remove the air valve cap.
3. Screw the FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump onto the air valve until the pump showspressure on the gauge. Do not over-tighten; see “Using the FOX High Pressure Pump” onpage 316.
4. Add air pressure until desired pressure is shown on the gauge. Refer to the Air Spring Set-ting Guidelines table below for the proper sag setting.
5. Unthread the pump from the air valve and measure sag.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 241/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RP2 Page 240
6. Repeat steps 2-5 until proper sag is achieved, then replace the air valve cap.
Adjusting ReboundRebound controls the rate at which your shock returns after it has been compressed. The prop-er rebound setting is a personal preference, and changes with rider weight, riding style andconditions. A rule of thumb is that rebound should be as fast as possible without kicking backand pushing the rider off the saddle.
The rebound knob has 8-10 clicks of adjustment.
For slower rebound, turn the red adjuster knob clockwise.
For faster rebound, turn the red adjuster knob counterclockwise.
ProPedal
The ProPedal lever allows for on-the-fly ProPedal adjustment. ProPedal damping reduces ped-al-induced suspension bob. The two ProPedal lever settings are:
• OPEN
• PROPEDAL
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Shock Travel (in./ mm) Sag (in./ mm)
1.00/25.4 .25/6.4
1.25/31.7 .31/7.9
1.50/38.1 .38/9.5
1.75/44.4 .44/11.1
2.00/50.8 .50/12.7
2.25/57.1 .56/14.2
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 242/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RP2 Page 241
Use each setting to adjust the shock for different riding conditions and situations. For example,use PROPEDAL for riding to the top of the mountain, and then switch to OPEN for the de-scent.
To determine which ProPedal position is better for your condition and situation, pedal the bi-cycle and monitor the shock movement. Switch between positions and select the one that re-duces suspension movement most effectively while providing the desired amount of bump
absorption.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 243/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT R (rear shock) Page 242
FLOAT R (rear shock)
Installing Your ShockIf you are installing your shock on a bike in which the shock is not original equipment:
1. Install the shock.
2. Remove the main air chamber air cap and let all the air out of the main air chamber.
3. Carefully cycle the suspension through its entire travel.4. Check that all parts of the shock are clear of the frame and swingarm as it cycles through
the travel.
5. Pressurize your main air chamber to a minimum of 50 PSI and no more than 300 PSI. Youwill tune to a more specific air pressure in the Setting Sag section below.
6. Set sag.
weight 0.44 lbs. / 200 g(6.50" x 1.50" No reducers)
features/adjustments high volume standard air sleeve, lightweightchassis, factory-set ProPedal, air springpressure, rebound adjust
spring air
intended use freeride, all-mountain, cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 244/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT R (rear shock) Page 243
General MaintenanceThere may be a small amount of air sleeve lubricant residue on the body. This is normal. If this residual air sleeve lubricant is not present, this is an indication that the air sleeve shouldbe re-lubricated. Some other things to consider for all shock models:
• If you ride in extreme conditions, service your shock and air sleeve more frequently.
See “Service Intervals” on page 303 to check the maintenance schedule for yourshock.
• Wash your shock with soap and water only.
• Do not use a high pressure washer to clean your shock.
• Internal service should be performed by FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized ServiceCenter; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
Before You Ride
1. Clean the outside of your shock with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r shock .
2. Inspect entire exterior of shock for damage. The shock should not be used if any of theexterior parts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox forfurther inspection and repair.
3. Check that quick-release levers (or thru-axle pinch bolts) are properly adjusted and tight-ened.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo set sag:
1. Measure sag (see “Measuring Sag” on page 246), and compare it to the recommended sagsetting shown in the Air Spring Setting Guidelines table below. Continue if the sag is notset to specification.
2. Locate the Schrader air valve on the shock and remove the air valve cap.
3. Screw the FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump onto the air valve until the pump showspressure on the gauge. Do not over-tighten; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
4. Add air pressure until desired pressure is shown on the gauge. Refer to the Air Spring Set-ting Guidelines table below for the proper sag setting.
5. Unthread the pump from the air valve and measure sag.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 until proper sag is achieved, then replace the air valve cap.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 245/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT R (rear shock) Page 244
Adjusting ReboundRebound controls the rate at which your shock returns after it has been compressed. The prop-er rebound setting is a personal preference, and changes with rider weight, riding style andconditions. A rule of thumb is that rebound should be as fast as possible without kicking backand pushing the rider off the saddle.
The rebound knob has 8-10 clicks of adjustment.
For slower rebound, turn the red adjuster knob clockwise.
For faster rebound, turn the red adjuster knob counterclockwise.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Shock Travel (in./ mm) Sag (in./ mm)
1.50/38.1 .38/9.5
1.75/44.4 .44/11.1
2.00/50.8 .50/12.7
2.25/57.1 .56/14.2
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 246/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT R (rear shock) Page 245
ProPedal Valving Options
FOX Racing Shox and your bike manufacturer have teamed up to deliver a FLOAT R shock thathas the perfect ProPedal tune for your bicycle’s rear suspension design.
Your FLOAT R is delivered to your bike manufacturer in one of three settings: FIRM, MEDI-UM , and LIGHT.
The setting of your FLOAT R is listed on the band at the bottom of the air sleeve and is denotedby an icon, as shown on the left.
• LIGHT is represented by the smallest bar.
• MEDIUM is represented by the middle bar.
• FIRM is represented by the largest bar.
The bar that is applicable to your tune will be highlighted and ?anked on top and bottom withindicator arrows.
Changing your ProPedal tune can be done at an Authorized FOX Service Center for a nominalfee as it is not considered a warranty item.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 247/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Measuring Sag Page 246
Measuring Sag
In general, sag on your rear shock should be set to 15 - 25% of shock travel, depending onriding conditions or personal preferences.
To measure sag on your rear shock:
MEASUREMENT #1
1. Before sitting on the bicycle, measure and record the distance from the center of one shockmounting bolt to the center of the other shock mounting bolt. This is known as the "eye-to-eye" measurement. Air shocks have an O-ring on the shock body. The O-ring should bepushed up against the scraper lip of the air sleeve without the rider on the bike. If thereis no o-ring, use the "eye-to-eye" method.
MEASUREMENT #2
2. Sit on the bicycle in a normal riding position. Your weight should be distributed on the sad-dle, handlebars and pedals. It is also recommended that you are properly outfitted in yourriding gear. It may be necessary to hold yourself up against a wall or post to steady your-self. Do not bounce on the pedals or saddle.
3. Have an assistant measure and record the eye-to-eye distance.For an air shock, dismount the bicycle and measure from the scraper lip to the O-ring. Thismeasurement is SAG.
4. Subtract MEASUREMENT #2 from MEASUREMENT #1. The difference is SAG.
MEASUREMENT #1 – MEASUREMENT #2 = SAG
(E.G., 7.875 – 7.275 = 0.600)
5. Consult the air or coil springs settings table in your respective shocks’ section. If the sagspecification is not in compliance, follow the instructions in Setting Sag in your respective
shock’s section.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 248/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Reducer Removal Page 247
Reducer Removal
1. Screw a 1/4 bolt extractor (see pictures below) counterclockwise with a pulling motion.The reducer will back out of the bushing.
2. Repeat for the other side.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 249/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual "Stuck Down" Shock P rocedure Page 248
"Stuck Down" Shock Procedure
Under certain circumstances, a FLOAT or DHX AIR shock can become "stuck down. If yourFLOAT or DHX AIR shock has not returned to its original neutral length (eye-to-eye position),
DO NOT attempt to disassemble the outer air sleeve or any other part of the shock. Air hasbecome trapped in the air negative chamber and can cause serious injury if the shock is dis-assembled. This condition is known as stuck down.
If your shock is stuck down, immediately return it to FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized Serv-ice Center for service; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
Procedure to check for a " stuck down" shock:
1. Release air pressure from the shock by removing the air cap and depressing the Schradervalve. You can use the top of the air cap to press in the Schrader valve.
2. Using a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump, pressurize the shock to 250 PSI (see “Usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump” on page 316).
3. If the shock does not extend, it is stuck down.
4. Contact FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized Service Center to obtain repair/service infor-mation. Do not attempt to pull apart, open, disassemble or service a shock that is stuckdown. Serious or fatal injuries can result. Contact FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized Serv-ice Center for assistance.
The Air Sleeve Maintenance procedure contains detailed information on clearing a stuck downshock; see “Air Sleeve Maintenance” on page 251. When working on an air shock, always as-sume that it is stuck down before taking it apart for service.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 250/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual AVA (Air Volume Adjuster) Page 249
AVA (Air Volume Adjuster)
Certain FLOAT models feature AVA, a technology that affords new levels of fine-tuning ad- justment. The AVA air sleeve replaces the standard air sleeve on your FLOAT rear shock. AVAincreases or decreases the volume of the positive air spring chamber, which allows the riderto alter the shape of the spring curve. The AVA system can create a shock with a 30% morelinear spring rate than a standard FLOAT shock. AVA allows as much as 200 lbs. of bottom-out adjustment.
AVA is a pre-ride tuning feature. The AVA system is not intended to be used on-the-fly. It isimportant to clean your shock, especially the threads of the AVA air sleeve, prior to adjust-ment. Rotation of the AVA ring may require complete deflation of the shock.
To adjust an AVA-equipped FLOAT rear shock:
1. Using a shock pump, let most or all of the air from the shock so that the AVA ring can beeasily turned.
2. Turn the ring until it just touches the wire ring that is snapped onto the air sleeve. This isthe maximum volume setting.
3. Pressurize the shock and set sag as normal. AVA does not affect sag.
4. If the shock seems to bottom out too easily, deflate the shock and rotate the ring to thenext setting on the air sleeve.
5. Pressurize the shock, set sag and test again for full stroke performance.
6. Repeat this process until the setting that best fits your riding style and terrain is achieved.
Air sleeve service can be performed as on other FLOAT shocks. Clean AVA seals after everyother normal FLOAT seal service, especially if riding conditions are muddy or dusty. Carefully
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 251/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual AVA (Air Volume Adjuster) Page 250
remove wire rings and air sleeves. Clean and inspect seals and parts for damage or wear. Re-lubricate and carefully re-assemble.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 252/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Air Sleeve Maintenance Page 251
Air Sleeve Maintenance
Caut ion : FOX a i r shocks con ta in h igh a i r p ressures . Be fo re serv ic ing a FOX a i r
shock , ce r ta in p r ecau t i ons and coun te r m easu r es need to be t aken . Fo l l ow these s teps i n o r de r , t o p r even t se r i ous in j u r y , and a lw ays wea r eye p r o tec t i on . I f you
do no t f ee l con f i den t i n pe r fo r m ing t h i s p r ocedu r e , con tac t a FOX Au tho r i zed
Serv ice Center .
Note : W h e n w o r k i n g o n a n a i r s h o ck , a l w a y s a ss u m e t h a t i t i s s t u ck d o w n b e -
fo r e s ta r t i ng se r v i ce.
1. Before beginning service, you need to make sure that the air shock you are servicing isnot stuck-down. A stuck down shock is a shock that is stuck at the bottom of its travel andwill not return.
2. The first step in troubleshooting a stuck-down shock is to pump up the main air chamberto 250PSI using a FOX High Pressure Pump.
3. The shock may extend slightly. However, the shock can still be stuck down. Continue onto the next step with caution.
4. Release all air pressure from the air sleeve air valve.
5. Cycle the shock a few times, then release air pressure from the air sleeve air valve again.
6. Remove the mounting hardware and remove the shock from the bicycle. In most cases, ahex wrench is all that is necessary to remove the mounting hardware. Hex wrench size willvary depending on manufacturer.
7. Remove reducers from the body end of the shock using a 1/4 bolt extractor.
8. Place the shock in a soft-jawed vice being careful not to crush any shock parts. Place thebreaker bar through the body eyelet and attempt to pull out the body shaft. If you cannot
pull it out, this confirms that the shock is stuck down. Proceed with caution.9. Put on your gloves and place a shop towel through the body eyelet to prevent the air sleeve
from coming off. Use a strap wrench to turn the air sleeve counterclockwise. YOU MAYHEAR A VERY LOUD POP WHEN REMOVING THE AIR SLEEVE! This is normal on a stuckdown shock.
10. Finish unscrewing the air sleeve by hand and pull it back from the shaft.
11.Remove the shop towel from the body eyelet then fully remove the air sleeve.
12.Clean the inside of the air sleeve with isopropyl alcohol or parts cleaner. Although a full setof replacement seals has been provided, it is not necessary to replace all of them on abrand-new unused shock. The body seal (quad ring), however, still needs to be replaced,as described in steps 17-18.
13.Clean the internal parts with isopropyl alcohol or parts cleaner.14. If necessary replace seals and backup rings with new seals and backup rings from the Air
Sleeve Rebuild Kit, FOX P/N 803-00-142, as described in the following steps.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 253/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Air Sleeve Maintenance Page 252
15. When replacing the air sleeve wiper, seal and backup rings, ensure that they are properlyoriented. Lightly lubricate all seals and rings before installing them. Use no more than half of the FLOAT Fluid pillow pack for this entire procedure.
16.Two shaft eyelet o-rings are supplied with the Air Sleeve Rebuild Kit; a 2000-04 FLOATrear shock uses the thicker o-ring, the 2005 and newer uses the thinner o-ring.
17.Remove the body seal (quad ring) and two backup rings, being careful not to scratch the
inside of the seal gland.18. Lightly lubricate the seals and rings before replacing them. Make sure that you use the
backup rings with slits. In this order, install a: 1) backup ring, 2) body seal (quad ring),3) the other backup ring onto the seal gland.
19. If necessary, replace the shaft eyelet o-ring. Carefully remove the old o-ring using a dentalpick. Lightly lubricate the new o-ring before installing it.
20. If necessary, remove the air sleeve dust wiper, seal and backup rings. Carefully removethese parts using a dental pick. If you are not removing these parts, skip to step 22.
21.Replace the backup ring, seal, backup ring, and dust wiper into the air sleeve seal glands.Squeeze the backup ring "like a potato chip to facilitate installation.
22.Slide the air sleeve onto the body. Do not screw the air sleeve on at this time.
23. Place 2cc of FLOAT Fluid into the air sleeve. Do not screw the air sleeve on at this time.
24. Install the travel indicator o-ring onto the body. Place the reducers (or requisite mountinghardware) back onto the body eyelets.
25.Mount the shock back onto the bicycle using the appropriate mounting hardware. Torquethe bolts to the bicycle manufacturer’s specifications. Due to frame design, you may haveto tighten the air sleeve before re-installing the shock.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 254/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Air Sleeve Maintenance Page 253
26.Press down on the bicycle seat to compress the rear suspension. This will make it easierto screw on the air sleeve. Thread the air sleeve by hand until it is tight. DO NOT over-tighten with a strap wrench or other tool.
27. Inflate your shock according to the shock owner’s manual.
28.Go ride.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 255/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual OE Custom Products Page 254
OE Custom Products
These products are available as OE only equipment on specific bicycle models. Refer to theowner’s manual for your bicycle to check for any bicycle-specific setup instructions.
In cases where fork and/or shock setup instructions are listed in your bicycle owner’s manual,those instructions override any setup instructions specified by FOX RACING SHOX.
Select your OE product:
If your product is not listed here, check the FOX Racing Shox website. Some OE-specific prod-
ucts contain user information on the bicycle it shipped on. Check your bicycle manufacturer’sowner’s manual or website for more information.
Forks Rear Shocks
“F29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC & F29 80RLC (OE Edition)” on page 287
“DHX Air 5.0” on page 197
“F29 100 RL & F29 80 RL (OE Edition)”
on page 296
“DHX Air 4.0” on page 202
“32 F90 RLC (OE Edition)” on page 275 “FLOAT RPL/Triad” on page 255
“32 F90 RL (OE Edition)” on page 282
“32 TALAS RLC (OE Edition)” on page260
“32 TALAS RL (OE Edition)” on page 268
Cannondale Lefty Forks
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 256/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RPL/ Triad Page 255
FLOAT RPL/Triad
Installing Your ShockIf you are installing your shock on a bike on which the shock is not original equipment:
1. Install the shock.
2. Remove the main air chamber air cap and let all the air out of the main air chamber.
3. Carefully cycle the suspension through its entire travel.
4. Check that all parts of the shock are clear of the frame and swingarm as it cycles through
the travel.5. Pressurize your main air chamber to a minimum of 50 PSI and no more than 300 PSI. You
will tune to a more specific air pressure in the Setting Sag section below.
6. Set sag.
weight 0.47 lbs. / 213 g(6.50" x 1.50" No reducers)
features/ adjustments lightweight chassis, ProPedal with 2 posi-tions, air spring pressure, rebound adjust
spring air
intended use freeride, all-mountain, cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 257/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RPL/ Triad Page 256
General MaintenanceThere may be a small amount of air sleeve lubricant residue on the body. This is normal. If this residual air sleeve lubricant is not present, this is an indication that the air sleeve shouldbe re-lubricated. Some other things to consider for all shock models:
• If you ride in extreme conditions, service your shock and air sleeve more frequently.
See “Service Intervals” on page 303 to check the maintenance schedule for yourshock.
• Wash your shock with soap and water only.
• Do not use a high pressure washer to clean your shock.
• Internal service should be performed by FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized ServiceCenter; see “Contact FOX” on page 321.
Before You Ride
1. Clean the outside of your shock with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r shock .
2. Inspect entire exterior of shock for damage. The shock should not be used if any of theexterior parts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox forfurther inspection and repair.
3. Check that quick-release levers (or thru-axle pinch bolts) are properly adjusted and tight-ened.
4. Check headset adjustment. Adjust headset if loose, according to manufacturer’s recom-mendations.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your FLOAT RPL shock, it is necessary to set sag . To setsag:
1. Locate the Schrader air valve on the shock and remove the valve cap.
2. Screw the FOX Racing Shox High Pressure pump onto the air valve until the pump showspressure on the gauge. Do not over-tighten the valve chuck.
3. Add air pressure until desired pressure is shown on the gauge. Refer to the appropriateFLOAT RPL Air Spring Settings table below.
4. Unthread the pump from the air valve and measure sag.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 until proper sag is achieved, then replace the air valve cap.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 258/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RPL/ Triad Page 257
Adjusting ReboundRebound controls the rate at which your shock returns after it has been compressed. The prop-er rebound setting is a personal preference, and changes with rider weight, riding style andconditions. A rule of thumb is that rebound should be as fast as possible without kicking backand pushing the rider off the saddle.
The rebound knob has 8-10 clicks of adjustment.
For slower rebound, turn the red adjuster knob clockwise.
For faster rebound, turn the red adjuster knob counterclockwise.
FLOAT RPL Air Spring Settings
Rider Weigh t lbs . ( kg) Main A ir Chamber P ressu re PSI
90 - 100 (41 - 45) 95 - 100
110 - 110 (45 - 50) 100 - 110
110 - 120 (50 - 54) 110 - 120
120 - 130 (54 - 60) 120 - 125
130 - 140 (60 - 64) 125 - 130
140 - 150 (64 - 68) 130 - 135
150 - 160 (68 - 73) 135 - 140
160 - 170 (73 - 77) 140 - 150
170 - 180 (77 - 82) 150 - 160
180 - 190 (82 - 86) 160 - 170
190 - 200 (86 - 91) 170 - 180
200 - 210 (91 - 95) 180 - 190
210 - 220 (95 - 100) 190 - 200
220 - 230 (100 - 104) 200 - 210
230 - 240 (104 - 109) 210 - 220
240 - 250 (109 - 113) 220 - 230
250 - 265 (113 - 120) 230 - 240
265 - 280 (120 - 127) 240 - 250
280 - 295 (127 - 134) 250 - 260
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 259/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RPL/ Triad Page 258
Adjusting CompressionSome bicycles feature a FOX Racing Shox FLOAT RPL shock. The FLOAT RPL has three on-the-fly suspension settings:
• OPEN (DESCENDING)
• PROPEDAL (FOR BUMP COMPLIANCE AND PEDALING EFFICIENCY)
• LOCKED (CLIMBING & ROAD RIDING)
Use the different settings to tune the shock to different riding conditions and situations. Forexample, use the PROPEDAL or LOCKED position for riding to the top of the mountain, andthen switch to the OPEN position for the descent. Because suspension designs and riding skillsvary, optimal settings can vary from bike to bike and rider to rider.
To determine which compression adjust position is best, pedal the bicycle at about 15 MPHand monitor the shock movement. Switch between positions and select the one that reducessuspension movement most effectively while providing the desired amount of bump absorp-tion. The setting may change depending on conditions and riding styles.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 260/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual FLOAT RPL/ Triad Page 259
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 261/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC (OE Edition) Page 260
32 TALAS RLC (OE Edition)
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
weight 3.90 lbs. / 1.76 kg
travel 5.9 in. / 150 mmTALAS 150+130+110 mm
features/ adjustments TALAS travel system, low-speed compres-sion, lockout, lockout force adjust, air springpressure, rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use all-mountain, cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 262/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC (OE Edition) Page 261
Before You Ride
1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for further in-spection and repair.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the center blue aircap in the middle of the TALAS lever (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schrader valve. Hold the TALAS lever steady with one handwhile unscrewing the aircap with the other. This will facilitate removal of the aircap andalso protect the TALAS lever from being forced past its stops.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting withthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 263/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC (OE Edition) Page 262
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.
Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table , screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag againand repeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Sag and spring rate will self-adjust to the proper setting and rate, as TALAS is adjusted toshorter travel positions.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 50 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 55 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 60 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 70 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 80 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 90 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 100 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM All-Mountain PLUSH
90 mm (3.5") 13 mm (1/2") 18 mm (3/4")
110 mm (4.25") 16 mm (3/5") 22 mm 7/8")
130 mm (5") 19 mm (3/4") 26 mm (1")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 264/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC (OE Edition) Page 263
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TI PS SETUP TIP S
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will pack
down and rideharsh.
If you increaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to slowdown your re-bound.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 265/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC (OE Edition) Page 264
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing and
sprinting situations, but will sag with the rider’s weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the eventthat a big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
Note : The fo r k m ay cycle a coup le o f t im es af te r enab l i ng l ockou t . Once com -
p le te l ockou t i s ach ieved , the fo r k m ay con t i nue to m ove 3 to 5 m m . Th i s i s
no r m a l and does no t a f fec t pe r fo r m ance.
Adjusting Lockout ForceEven when your fork is fully locked out, there are instances when you still want your fork tobe active. To protect your fork’s internal parts, your FOX fork will "blowoff" when it encountersan intense hit. You can adjust when the fork blows off—lockout force—by adjusting the blueknob on the bottom of the right leg.
A convenient tuning feature of the lockout force knob is that it allows you to leave your forkin the locked out position—no more fiddling with fork controls when the trail requires your un-divided attention. Although you might need to adjust the knob a few times to find the sweetspot, once it is found you can simply leave your fork locked out. Your fork will then respondto hits in the trail (greater lockout force), for example, but will be locked out (lower lockoutforce) when you are out of your saddle on a climb.
6
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 266/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC (OE Edition) Page 265
Turn the knob clockwise to increase lockout force and counterclockwise to decrease lockoutforce.
There are 12 clicks of adjustment. As a starting point, turn the knob all the way clockwise untilit stops, then back off one click counterclockwise.
Adjusting Low -Speed CompressionLow-speed compression damping is adjusted with the blue bezel ring (shown below) below theblue lockout lever, and has 8 clicks of adjustment. Compression damping controls the speedat which the fork compresses. Adjust low-speed compression with lockout disabled (lockoutlever fully counterclockwise). As a starting point, turn the low-speed compression dial all theway counterclockwise (full out) until it stops, then turn clockwise (in) 5 clicks.
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS SETUP TIPS
1
Soft Compression Too soft and yourfork will pack
down and rideharsh.
Maximum wheeltraction and bump
compliance. Too softand you maybe haveexcessive brake diveand wallowy feel.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 267/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC (OE Edition) Page 266
Changing Travel32 mm TALAS forks feature three externally adjustable travel choices from 5 (130 mm) to4.25" (110 mm) to 3.5 (90 mm), which are easily selected using the TALAS lever (shown be-low) on top of the left fork leg. Travel options and direction settings are printed directly on thelever.When changing travel, the TALAS system automatically adjusts to provide you with the ap-
propriate linear air spring rate for each travel setting. There is no need to re-adjust the airpressure in the TALAS air chamber after changing travel.
For safety reasons, it is recommended that travel adjustment be done while off the bike. If necessary, travel can be adjusted on-the-fly (be careful when using this "extreme" travel ad- justing method), which can be handy right before a grueling climb or steep descent.
Decreasing Travel
From the 130 or 110 mm position, turn the lever counterclockwise to decrease travel. Travelwill be decreased in 20 mm increments. Do not force the lever past the 90 mm position.
Increasing Travel
From the 90 or 110 mm position, turn the lever clockwise to increase travel. Travel will beincreased in 20 mm increments. Do not force the lever past the 130 mm position.
5(Factory set-ting)
Average Compression
9
Firm Compres-sion
Too firm and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
Resists brake diveand keeps the fork
up in the travel. Toofirm and you mayhave poor traction inloose conditions.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 268/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RLC (OE Edition) Page 267
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 269/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RL (OE Edition) Page 268
32 TALAS RL (OE Edition)
weight 3.84 lbs. / 1.74 kg
travel 5.9 in. / 150 mmTALAS 150+130+110 mm
features/ adjustments TALAS travel system, lockout, lockout forceadjust, air spring pressure, rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use all-mountain, cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 270/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RL (OE Edition) Page 269
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for further in-spection and repair.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the center blue aircap in the middle of the TALAS lever (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schrader valve. Hold the TALAS lever steady with one hand
while unscrewing the aircap with the other. This will facilitate removal of the aircap andalso protect the TALAS lever from being forced past its stops.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 271/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RL (OE Edition) Page 270
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting withthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table , screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag againand repeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 50 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 55 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 60 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 70 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 80 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 90 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 100 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM All-Mountain PLUSH
90 mm (3.5") 13 mm (1/2") 18 mm (3/4")
110 mm (4.25") 16 mm (3/5") 22 mm (7/8")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 272/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RL (OE Edition) Page 271
Sag and spring rate will self adjust to the proper setting and rate as TALAS is adjusted toshorter travel positions.
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
130 mm (5") 19 mm (3/4") 26 mm (1")
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-
lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-
ments
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKSOUT FROM
FULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNI NG TI PS SETUP TI PS
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 273/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RL (OE Edition) Page 272
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing andsprinting situations, but will sag with the rider’s weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the eventthat a big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
Note : The fo r k m ay cycle a coup le o f t im es a f te r l ockou t i s enab led . Once
comp le te l ockou t i s ach ieved , the fo r k m ay con t i n ue to m ove 3 to 5 mm . Th i s
i s no r ma l and does no t a f fect pe r fo r m ance.
Adjusting Lockout ForceEven when your fork is fully locked out, there are instances when you still want your fork tobe active. To protect your fork’s internal parts, your FOX fork will "blowoff" when it encountersan intense hit. You can adjust when the fork blows off—lockout force—by adjusting the blueknob on the bottom of the right leg.
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will packdown and rideharsh.
If you increaseyour spring rate orair pressure, youwill need to slowdown your re-bound.
6
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experiencepoor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate orair pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 274/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RL (OE Edition) Page 273
A convenient tuning feature of the lockout force knob is that it allows you to leave your forkin the locked out position—no more fiddling with fork controls when the trail requires your un-divided attention. Although you might need to adjust the knob a few times to find the sweetspot, once it is found you can simply leave your fork locked out. Your fork will then respondto hits in the trail (greater lockout force), for example, but will be locked out (lower lockoutforce) when you are out of your saddle on a climb.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase lockout force and counterclockwise to decrease lockoutforce.
There are 12 clicks of adjustment. As a starting point, turn the knob all the way clockwise untilit stops, then back off one click counterclockwise.
Changing Travel32 mm TALAS forks feature three externally adjustable travel choices from 5.5 (140 mm) to4.72" (120 mm) to 3.93 (100 mm), which are easily selected using the TALAS lever on top of the left fork leg. Travel options and direction settings are printed directly on the lever.
When changing travel, the TALAS system automatically adjusts to provide you with the ap-
propriate linear air spring rate for each travel setting. There is no need to re-adjust the airpressure in the TALAS air chamber after changing travel.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 275/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 TALAS RL (OE Edition) Page 274
For safety reasons, it is recommended that travel adjustment be done while off the bike. If necessary, travel can be adjusted on-the-fly (be careful when using this "extreme" travel ad- justing method), which can be handy right before a grueling climb or steep descent.
Decreasing Travel
From the 130 or 110 mm position, turn the lever counterclockwise to decrease travel. Travelwill be decreased in 20 mm increments. Do not force the lever past the 90 mm position.
Increasing Travel
From the 90 or 110 mm position, turn the lever clockwise to increase travel. Travel will beincreased in 20 mm increments. Do not force the lever past the 130 mm position.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 276/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F90 RLC (OE Edition) Page 275
32 F90 RLC (OE Edition)
Caut ion : Do no t r em ove t r ave l space r s, o r i nc r ease the t r ave l i n th e F- Se r ies
fo r ks . Damage to t he fo r k o r se r i ous i n ju r y m ay r esu l t !
weight 3.38 lbs. / 1.53 kg
travel 3.5 inches / 90 mm
features/ adjustments low-speed compression, lockout, lockoutforce adjust, air spring pressure, rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 277/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F90 RLC (OE Edition) Page 276
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for further in-spection and repair.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the blue aircap (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schradervalve.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 278/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F90 RLC (OE Edition) Page 277
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table , screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag againand repeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
AIR SPRI NG SETTING GUIDELINES
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 50 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 55 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 75 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 85 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 95 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 105 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM PLUSH
80 mm (3 1/8") 12 mm (1/2") 20 mm (3/4")
100 mm (4") 15 mm (5/8") 25 mm (1")
120 mm (4.7") 18 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1 1/4")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 279/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F90 RLC (OE Edition) Page 278
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIP S SETUP TI PS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will pack
down and rideharsh.
If you increaseyour spring rate
or air pressure,you will need toslow down your re-bound
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 280/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F90 RLC (OE Edition) Page 279
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing and
sprinting situations, but will sag with the rider’s weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the eventthat a big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
Note : The fo r k m ay cycle a coup le o f t im es af te r enab l i ng l ockou t . Once com -
p le te l ockou t i s ach ieved , the fo r k m ay con t i n ue to m ove 3 - 5 mm . Th i s i s no r -
m a l and does no t a f fec t pe r fo r m ance.
Adjusting Lockout ForceEven when your fork is fully locked out, there are instances when you still want your fork tobe active. To protect your fork’s internal parts, your FOX fork will "blowoff" when it encountersan intense hit. You can adjust when the fork blows off—lockout force—by adjusting the blueknob on the bottom of the right leg.
A convenient tuning feature of the lockout force knob is that it allows you to leave your forkin the locked out position—no more fiddling with fork controls when the trail requires your un-divided attention. Although you might need to adjust the knob a few times to find the sweetspot, once it is found you can simply leave your fork locked out. Your fork will then respondto hits in the trail (greater lockout force), for example, but will be locked out (lower lockoutforce) when you are out of your saddle on a climb.
6
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 281/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F90 RLC (OE Edition) Page 280
Turn the knob clockwise to increase lockout force and counterclockwise to decrease lockoutforce.
There are 12 clicks of adjustment. As a starting point, turn the knob all the way clockwise untilit stops, then back off one click counterclockwise.
Adjusting Low -Speed CompressionLow-speed compression damping is adjusted with the blue bezel ring (shown below) below theblue lockout lever, and has 8 clicks of adjustment. Compression damping controls the speedat which the fork compresses. Adjust low-speed compression with lockout disabled (lockoutlever fully counterclockwise). As a starting point, turn the low-speed compression dial all theway counterclockwise (full out) until it stops, then turn clockwise (in) 5 clicks.
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS SETUP TIPS
1
Soft Compression Too soft and yourfork will pack
down and rideharsh.
Maximum wheeltraction and bump
compliance. Too softand you maybe haveexcessive brake diveand wallowy feel.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 282/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F90 RLC (OE Edition) Page 281
5(Factory set-ting)
Average Com-pression
9
Firm Compression Too firm and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
Resists brake diveand keeps the fork
up in the travel. Toofirm and you mayhave poor traction inloose conditions.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 283/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F90 RL (OE Edition) Page 282
32 F90 RL (OE Edition)
Caut ion : Do no t r em ove t r ave l space r s, o r i nc r ease the t r ave l i n th e F- Se r ies f o r k s . D am a g e t o t h e f o r k a n d / o r s er i o u s in j u r y m a y r e su l t !
weight 3.33 lbs. / 1.51 kg
travel 3.5 inches / 90 mm
features/ adjustments lockout, air spring pressure, rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 284/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F90 RL (OE Edition) Page 283
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride9. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
10.Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
11. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for further in-spection and repair.
12.Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturers recommendations.
13.Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.14.Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15-25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the blue aircap (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schradervalve.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump (see “Using the FOX High PressurePump” on page 316).
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 285/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F90 RL (OE Edition) Page 284
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table , screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag againand repeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 50 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 55 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 75 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 85 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 95 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 105 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM PLUSH
80 mm (3 1/8") 12 mm (1/2") 20 mm (3/4")
100 mm (4") 15 mm (5/8") 25 mm (1")
120 mm (4.7") 18 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1 1/4")
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 286/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F90 RL (OE Edition) Page 285
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOB SET-TING
(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TI PS SETUP TIPS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will packdown and rideharsh.
If you increaseyour spring rate orair pressure, youwill need to slowdown your re-bound
6
(Factory set-
ting)
Average Rebound
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 287/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual 32 F90 RL (OE Edition) Page 286
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing andsprinting situations, but will sag with the riders weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the event thata big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experiencepoor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate orair pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 288/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners ManualF29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC & F29 80 RLC (OE Edition) Page 287
F29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC & F29 80RLC (OE Edition)
weightF120: 3.87 lb / 1.75 kgF100: 3.78 lb / 1.71 kgF80: 3.78 lb / 1.71 kg
travelF120: 4.7 inches / 120 mmF100: 3.9 inches / 100 mmF80: 3.1 inches / 80 mm
features/ adjustments low-speed compression, lever-actuatedlockout, lockout force adjust, air spring pres-sure, rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 289/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners ManualF29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC & F29 80 RLC (OE Edition) Page 288
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for further in-spection and repair.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15 – 25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the blue aircap (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schradervalve.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve (see “Using the FOXHigh Pressure Pump” on page 316).
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting using
the FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 290/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners ManualF29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC & F29 80 RLC (OE Edition) Page 289
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.
Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table , screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag againand repeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 50 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 55 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 75 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 85 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 95 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 105 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM PLUSH
80 mm (3 1/8") 12 mm (1/2") 20 mm (3/4")
100 mm (4") 15 mm (5/8") 25 mm (1")
120 mm (4.7") 18 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1 1/4")
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 291/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners ManualF29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC & F29 80 RLC (OE Edition) Page 290
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized
(-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIP S SETUP TI PS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will pack
down and rideharsh.
If you increaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to slowdown your re-bound
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 292/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners ManualF29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC & F29 80 RLC (OE Edition) Page 291
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing and
sprinting situations, but will sag with the rider’s weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the eventthat a big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
Note : The fo r k m ay cycle a coup le o f t im es af te r enab l i ng l ockou t . Once com -
p le te l ockou t i s ach ieved , the fo r k m ay con t i nue to m ove 3 to 5 m m . Th i s i s
no r m a l and does no t a f fec t pe r fo r m ance.
Adjusting Lockout ForceEven when your fork is fully locked out, there are instances when you still want your fork tobe active. To protect your fork’s internal parts, your FOX fork will "blowoff" when it encountersan intense hit. You can adjust when the fork blows off—lockout force—by adjusting the blueknob on the bottom of the right leg.
A convenient tuning feature of the lockout force knob is that it allows you to leave your forkin the locked out position—no more fiddling with fork controls when the trail requires your un-divided attention. Although you might need to adjust the knob a few times to find the sweetspot, once it is found you can simply leave your fork locked out. Your fork will then respondto hits in the trail (greater lockout force), for example, but will be locked out (lower lockoutforce) when you are out of your saddle on a climb.
6
(Factory set-ting)
Average Rebound
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate or
air pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 293/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners ManualF29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC & F29 80 RLC (OE Edition) Page 292
Turn the knob clockwise to increase lockout force and counterclockwise to decrease lockoutforce.
There are 12 clicks of adjustment. As a starting point, turn the knob all the way clockwise untilit stops, then back off one click counterclockwise.
Adjusting Low -Speed CompressionLow-speed compression damping is adjusted with the blue bezel ring (shown below) below theblue lockout lever, and has 8 clicks of adjustment. Compression damping controls the speedat which the fork compresses. Adjust low-speed compression with lockout disabled (lockoutlever fully counterclockwise). As a starting point, turn the low-speed compression dial all theway counterclockwise (full out) until it stops, then turn clockwise (in) 5 clicks.
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKS INFROM FULLOUT)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TIPS SETUP TIPS
1
Soft Compression Too soft and yourfork will pack
down and rideharsh.
Maximum wheeltraction and bump
compliance. Too softand you maybe haveexcessive brake diveand wallowy feel.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 294/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners ManualF29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC & F29 80 RLC (OE Edition) Page 293
Changing TravelTravel on your F-SERIES fork can be changed by rearranging the internal travel spacers. Afterchanging travel. check the fork for proper operation before riding. If there is noticeable playin the fork or if it makes strange noises, disassemble the fork and check for complete numberand correct orientation of spacers.
Note : An F100 can be l owe r ed i n t r ave l t o 80 m m , bu t an F80 canno t be i n - c r ea se d t o 1 0 0 m m .
Tools Required for Travel Change
• 26 mm 6-sided socket
• 10 mm socket
• Small screwdriver
• Torque wrench
• Oil drain pan
• Plastic-faced hammer
• Measuring container w/ cc or mL increments
Supplies Required for Travel Change
5(Factory set-ting)
Average Com-pression
9
Firm Compres-sion
Too firm and youwill experience
poor traction andwheel hop.
Resists brake diveand keeps the fork
up in the travel. Toofirm and you mayhave poor traction inloose conditions.
Supplies Required
Quantity Part Number Part Name
1 025-03-004-A 1 qt. bottle of FOX Suspen-
sion Fluid (7 wt.)
1 025-03-002-A 5 cc Pillow Pack of FOX FLOATFluid
2 241-01-002-C Crush washer
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 295/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners ManualF29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC & F29 80 RLC (OE Edition) Page 294
1. Remove the blue air cap from the top of the left fork leg. Let the air out of the fork. Removethe left top cap with a 26 mm socket 6-point socket wrench.
2. Loosen the bottom nut 3-4 turns with a 10 mm wrench. With a plastic mallet, gently tapthe bottom of the shaft to disengage it from the lower leg. Allow oil to drain into a bucket.Remove the bottom nut and crush washer.
3. Compress the fork as much as possible. The air piston will be visible about one inch belowthe top of the upper tube. Push the bottom of the air shaft upwards to push the air pistonout of the top of the upper tube. Use a long, thin shaft screwdriver to push the bottom of the air shaft up through the hole in the bottom of the lower leg.
4. Pull the air-shaft assembly from the fork. Refer to the drawings on the next page and addor remove the appropriate spacer(s) to achieve the desired travel. Spacers snap onto theair shaft between the negative spring guide and topout plate, as shown in the travel spacerorientation drawing below.
5. Lubricate the U-cup seal on the air piston with FOX FLOAT Fluid and re-install the air shaft
assembly into the upper tube. Be sure to orient the U-cup seal as shown in the Seal Ori-entation drawing below.
6. Push the shaft until it approaches the bottom hole of the fork. Do not push the shaft allthe way through the bottom hole.
7. Turn the fork upside down. Measure and pour 30 cc of FOX Suspension Fluid through thebottom hole.
8. Push the air shaft assembly up until the shaft comes through the bottom hole. Install thecrush washer and bottom nut. Torque to 50 in-lbs.
9. Turn the fork right side up. Pour 5 cc of FOX FLOAT Fluid on top of the air piston.
10. Lubricate the o-ring on the air topcap with FOX FLOAT Fluid.
11.Re-install the topcap and torque to 165 in-lbs.
12. Pump up the fork to the desired pressure and cycle it several times to check for properoperation.
13.Re-install the blue air cap.
14.You’re done. Go ride.
1 803-00-078 32 mm Cartridge Seal Kit (op-tional)
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 296/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners ManualF29 120 RLC, F29 100 RLC & F29 80 RLC (OE Edition) Page 295
Travel Spacer Orientation
Seal Orientation
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 297/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 100 RL & F29 80 RL (OE Edition) Page 296
F29 100 RL & F29 80 RL (OE Edi-tion)
weightF120: 3.83 lbs. / 1.73 kgF100: 3.74 lbs. / 1.69 kgF80: 3.74 lbs. / 1.69 kg
travelF120: 4.7 inches / 120 mmF100: 3.9 inches / 100 mmF80: 3.1 inches / 80 mm
features/ adjustments lever-actuated lockout, air spring pressure,rebound
spring/damper type air/open bath
intended use cross-country
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 298/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 100 RL & F29 80 RL (OE Edition) Page 297
Installing Your ForkBe sure your fork is properly installed before proceeding. If your fork came pre-installed onyour bicycle, continue to the next section, otherwise see “Installing a 32 mm Fork” on page 16 .
Before You Ride1. Check that quick-release levers are properly adjusted and tightened.
2. Clean the outside of your fork with soap and water and wipe dry with a soft dry rag. Donot spray water directly on the seal/upper tube junction.
Caut ion : Do no t use a h igh p r essu r e w asher on you r f o r k .
3. Inspect entire exterior of fork for damage. The fork should not be used if any of the exteriorparts appear to be damaged. Contact your local dealer or FOX Racing Shox for further in-spection and repair.
4. Check headset adjustment. If loose, adjust according to manufacturers recommendations.
5. Check that brake cables or hoses are properly fastened.
6. Check that the front and rear brakes operate properly on flat land.
Setting SagTo get the best performance from your fork, it is necessary to set and adjust sag. Generally,sag should be set to 15-25% of total fork travel.
1. Unscrew the blue aircap (shown below) on top of the left fork leg to expose the Schradervalve.
2. Attach a FOX Racing Shox High Pressure Pump to the Schrader valve.
3. Using the Air Spring Settings table below, pump your fork to the appropriate setting usingthe FOX High Pressure Pump, then remove the pump.
4. Install a zip tie with light friction on the upper tube and push it down until it contacts thefork seal.
5. Carefully sit on the bike and assume a normal riding position. The fork should compressslightly.
6. Being careful not to further compress the fork, dismount the bicycle. Measure the distancebetween the seal and the zip tie. This distance is sag.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 299/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 100 RL & F29 80 RL (OE Edition) Page 298
7. Compare your sag measurement to the Sag Setup table below.
If your sag is lower than on the table, screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and depress the black bleed-valve to reduce the gauge pressure by 5 PSI.Measure sag again and repeat adjustment, if necessary.
If your sag is higher than on the table , screw on the pump fitting, note the current airpressure setting and pump to increase the gauge pressure by 5 PSI. Measure sag againand repeat adjustment if necessary.
8. Screw the blue aircap back on, and go ride.
Air Spring Setting Guidelines
Rider Weight Air Pressure
< 125 lbs. 45 PSI
125 - 135 lbs. 50 PSI
135 - 145 lbs. 55 PSI
145 - 155 lbs. 65 PSI
155 - 170 lbs. 75 PSI
170 - 185 lbs. 85 PSI
185 - 200 lbs. 95 PSI
200 - 215 lbs. 105 PSI
215 - 230 lbs 115 PSI
230 - 250 lbs. 125 PSI
Sag Setup
Travel XC/ Race FIRM PLUSH
80 mm (3 1/8") 12 mm (1/2") 20 mm (3/4")
100 mm (4") 15 mm (5/8") 25 mm (1")
120 mm (4.7") 18 mm (3/4") 30 mm (1 1/4")
Sag Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Too much sag (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 300/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 100 RL & F29 80 RL (OE Edition) Page 299
Adjusting ReboundThe rebound knob (shown below) is located on the top of the right fork leg, and has 12 clicksof adjustment. Rebound controls the speed at which the fork extends after compressing. Turn-ing the knob clockwise slows down rebound; turning the knob counterclockwise speeds up re-bound. As a starting point, turn the rebound adjuster knob all the way clockwise (full in) untilit stops, then turn counterclockwise (out) 6 clicks.
Too little sag (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Excessive bottoming (+) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
Harsh ride; full travel not uti-lized (-) air pressure in 5 PSI incre-ments
KNOB SET-TING(CLICKSOUT FROMFULL IN)
SETTING DE-SCRIPTION
TUNING TI PS SETUP TIPS
1
Slow Rebound Too slow and yourfork will packdown and rideharsh.
If you increaseyour spring rate orair pressure, youwill need to slowdown your re-bound
6
(Factory set-
ting)
Average Rebound
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 301/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 100 RL & F29 80 RL (OE Edition) Page 300
Locking Out the ForkThe blue compression lockout lever is located below the red rebound adjuster knob. It allowsthe rider to close the compression damping circuit in the fork. This keeps the fork at the topof its travel, making it harder to compress.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to lockout the fork. This position is useful in climbing andsprinting situations, but will sag with the riders weight. The fork will "blowoff" in the event thata big hit is encountered with the fork locked out.
To unlock the fork, simply rotate the lever fully counterclockwise.
Changing TravelTravel on your F-SERIES fork can be changed by rearranging the internal travel spacers. Afterchanging travel, check the fork for proper operation before riding. If there is noticeable playin the fork or if it makes strange noises, disassemble the fork and check for complete numberand correct orientation of spacers.
Note : An F100 can be l owe r ed i n t r ave l t o 80 m m , bu t an F80 canno t be i n -
c r ea se d t o 1 0 0 m m .
Tools Required for Travel Change
• 26 mm 6-sided socket
• 10 mm socket
• Small screwdriver
• Torque wrench
• Oil drain pan
• Plastic-faced hammer
12
Fast Rebound Too fast and youwill experiencepoor traction andwheel hop.
If you decreaseyour spring rate orair pressure, youwill need to speedup your reboundsetting.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 302/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 100 RL & F29 80 RL (OE Edition) Page 301
• Measuring container with cc or mL increments
Supplies Required for Travel Change
1. Remove the blue air cap from the top of the left fork leg. Let the air out of the fork. Removethe left top cap with a 26 mm socket 6-point socket wrench.
2. Loosen the bottom nut 3-4 turns with a 10 mm wrench. With a plastic mallet, gently tapthe bottom of the shaft to disengage it from the lower leg. Allow oil to drain into a bucket.Remove the bottom nut and crush washer.
3. Compress the fork as much as possible. The air piston will be visible about one inch belowthe top of the upper tube. Push the bottom of the air shaft upwards to push the air pistonout of the top of the upper tube. Use a long, thin shaft screwdriver to push the bottom of the air shaft up through the hole in the bottom of the lower leg.
4. Pull the air-shaft assembly from the fork. Refer to the drawings on the next page and addor remove the appropriate spacer(s) to achieve the desired travel. Spacers snap onto the
air shaft between the negative spring guide and topout plate, as shown in the travel spacerorientation drawing below.
5. Lubricate the U-cup seal on the air piston with FOX FLOAT Fluid and re-install the air shaftassembly into the upper tube. Be sure to orient the U-cup seal as shown in the Seal Ori-entation drawing below.
6. Push the shaft until it approaches the bottom hole of the fork. Do not push the shaft allthe way through the bottom hole.
7. Turn the fork upside down. Measure and pour 30 cc of FOX Suspension Fluid through thebottom hole.
8. Push the air shaft assembly up until the shaft comes through the bottom hole. Install thecrush washer and bottom nut. Torque to 50 in-lbs.
9. Turn the fork right side up. Pour 5 cc of FOX FLOAT Fluid on top of the air piston.10. Lubricate the o-ring on the air topcap with FOX FLOAT Fluid.
11.Re-install the topcap and torque to 165 in-lbs.
12. Pump up the fork to the desired pressure and cycle it several times to check for properoperation.
13.Re-install the blue air cap.
Supplies Required
Quantity Part Number Part Name
1 025-03-004-A 1 qt. bottle of FOX SuspensionFluid (7 wt.)
1 025-03-002-A 5 cc Pillow Pack of FOX FLOATFluid
2 241-01-002-C Crush washer
1 803-00-078 32 mm Cartridge Seal Kit (op-tional)
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 303/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual F29 100 RL & F29 80 RL (OE Edition) Page 302
14.Youre done. Go ride.
Travel Spacer Orientation
Seal Orientation
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 304/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Service Intervals Page 303
Service Intervals
Rear Shocks
32 mm Forks (FLOAT, F-SERIES, TALAS, VANILLA, F29)
item new everyride
every8hours
every30hours
every 100hours/ an-nually
set sag X
set damping adjustments X
clean exterior of shock with mild soap andwater
X
air sleeve mainte-nance (FLOAT &
DHX Air shocks)
wet & muddy con-ditions
X
dry & dusty condi-tions
X
clean and inspect bushings & reducers X
suspension fluid service (must be per-formed by FOX Racing Shox or AuthorizedService Center)
X
item new everyride/ race every 15hours every 100hours every 50hours
set sag X
set damping adjustments X
clean exterior of fork with mildsoap and water
X
clean and inspect dust wipers X
inspect dropout thickness X
inspect bushings X
change oil X
change FLOAT fluid in airchamber (FLOAT & F-Seriesmodels only)
X
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 305/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Service Intervals Page 304
36 mm Forks
40 mm Fork
item new everyride/ race
every 15hours
every 100hours
every 50hours
set sag X
set damping adjustments X
clean exterior of fork with mildsoap and water
X
clean and inspect dust wipers X
inspect bushings X
change oil X
change FLOAT fluid in airchamber
(FLOAT & F-Series models on-ly)
X
item new everyride/ race
every 15hours
every 100hours
every 50hours
set sag X
set damping adjustments X
clean exterior of fork with mild
soap and water
X
clean and inspect dust wipers X
inspect bushings X
change oil X
change FLOAT fluid in airchamber(FLOAT & F-SERIES models on-ly)
X
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 306/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Suspension Tuning Tips Page 305
Suspension Tuning Tips
Note : Un less no ted o the r w ise, t hese tun ing t i ps app l y to bo th fo r ks and r ea r
shocks .
Symptoms: Not using full travel, feels harsh, poor traction while making turns
Causes: Overly stiff spring or compression damping
Solutions: Lower air pressure or softer coil springs; reduce compression damping
Symptoms: Bottoms out, soft throughout travel
Causes: Spring rate too low throughout travel or too little compression damping
Solutions: More air pressure or stiffer coils springs; increase compression damping
Symptoms: Harsh over large bumps, but good over small onesCauses: Compression damping too high
Solutions: Reduce compression damping
Symptoms: Excessive sag, feels soft initially but does not bottom out
Causes: Initial spring rate or preload too low
Solutions: Increase air pressure or spring preload
Symptoms: Harsh over small bumps but uses full travel
Causes: Initial spring rate or preload too high, or too much compression damping
Solutions: Lower air pressure or install softer springs; reduce compression damping; reducespring preload
Symptoms: Takes first bump in a series well but harsh over later bumps, poor traction inwashboard corners
Causes: Too much rebound damping
Solutions: Reduce rebound damping, if adjustable
Symptoms: Front end springs back too quickly after bumps, poor traction in bumpy corners
Causes: Not enough rebound dampingSolutions: Increase rebound damping, if adjustable
Symptoms: Lockout not working
Causes: Not enough suspension fluid in the damper; RLC forks only: blowoff threshold knobis fully counterclockwise
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 307/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Suspension Tuning Tips Page 306
Solutions: Check damper suspension fluid level; RLC forks only: turn blowoff thresholdknob fully clockwise then cycle fork a few times
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 308/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Bushing Technology & Inspection Page 307
Bushing Technology & Inspection
FOX Racing Shox forks use hydrodynamic lubrication. This system force feeds oil into the tall,slotted bushings during the compression stroke. When the fork cycles up and down, the oil is
trapped between bushings, upper tubes and seals.
Thermal expansion rates can cause the bushings to close in on the upper tubes, causing highfriction and binding during normal operation. Correct bushing clearance is critical to preventbinding of the fork during normal operation.
Geometric dimensioning and tolerance is a design practice used to ensure parts will work/fitduring the manufacturing process. Bushings are sized before installation and re-checked forsize after installation. Correct bushing tolerance is a diametric clearance of 0.0015–0.0090.
Showroom Testing
As you rock the fork back and forth with the front brake applied, the bushings only have asmall amount of lubricant separating the bushing/upper tube. At this time you may notice a
small amount of bushing play. Fork bushings must have clearance to perform correctly. Toolittle clearance will cause high friction, binding, or bushing seizure when hot.
Real World Testing
During normal riding conditions, hydrodynamic lubrication occurs when there is a completeseparation of the upper tube from the bushing by a thin film of oil. Hydrodynamic lubricationis characterized by very low friction and no wearing of the bushings or shaft since there is nometal-to-bushing contact. During hydrodynamic lubrication, normal bushing clearance will notbe noticeable.
Bushings should be checked annually for excessive wear. If excessive fore and aft movementis detected between the upper tubes and lower legs, contact an Authorized Service Center or
Fox Racing Shox for further instructions (see “Contact FOX” on page 321).
To check bushing play:
1. Grasp the lower legs at the dropouts (axle).
2. Push the fork straight back towards the rear wheel, then pull it towards you.
3. Grasp the fork near the upper tube/seal junction and try the same thing.
4. If excessive movement is noticed, contact FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized Service Cent-er.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 309/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Control Direction Page 308
Control Direction
Use the diagrams below if you need help deciphering control orientation.
Since most, if not all, fork controls are performed relative to the seated riders’ perspective,fork control directions are relatively straightforward. However, rear shocks can be confusingsince there are myriad suspension designs, which require FOX Racing Shox rear shocks to bemounted in a variety of positions.
Using the drawings shown in the respective shock’s section combined with the rear shock con-trol diagram below, you should be able to figure out the proper direction for knob control. Ul-timately, suspension performance that seems to be opposite of your intended adjustment willbe ample notice that you went in the wrong direction—thus, it’s safe to assume that the op-posite direction will be the correct one.
Clockwise/ Counterclockwise Definition
A clockwise (also: IN) motion is one that is “in the direction as the hands of a clock”; from the
top to the right, then down and then to the left, and back to the top. Conversely, counterclock-wise (also: OUT) is one that is “in the opposite direction of the clock hands”; from the top tothe left, then down and then to the right, and back to the top.
Fork Control Directions
Use this diagram to orient the controls in the fork drawings shown throughout FOXHelp. Knobcontrol directions are relative to looking at the knob straight on. For controls on the bottomof the fork, this would mean that you would be on the ground and looking up at the fork con-trols.
Rear Shock Control Directions
Use this diagram to orient the controls in the rear shock drawings shown throughout FOXHelp.Knob control directions are relative to looking at the knob straight on. The Z axis may assistyou in aligning certain drawings as some of them are not shown looking at the control straighton, but at an angle.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 310/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Seals & Foam Rings Page 309
Seals & Foam Rings
FOX Racing Shox forks feature a sealing system designed to keep your fork moving smoothlyin all conditions. There are two parts to the system: the fork seal and the foam ring. The fork
seal features a proprietary scraper lip geometry that keeps dirt out and oil in. The foam ringsits just below the fork seal. It is saturated with oil and in turn applies oil to the upper tubeas it passes by. This keeps the fork moving up and down smoothly.
While FOX Racing Shox forks are designed to require minimal maintenance, periodic inspec-tion and cleaning of the fork sealing system is required. It is normal on FOX forks for a smallamount of oil and/or grease to accumulate on the upper tubes. This is necessary to keep thefork working smoothly and to keep dirt out. Furthermore, fork seals are grease packed at thefactory. This grease tends to migrate out of the seals during the break-in period.
Storing the bicycle upside down and inverting the fork allows oil to run down to the foam ringsand keeps them lubricated and ready for your next ride.
To check the conditions of the seal and foam rings, see “Dust Wiper Seal Quick Clean & Lube” on page 183.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 311/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Dropout Thickness Inspection Page 310
Dropout Thickness Inspection
Over time the knurled surfaces of the front wheel hub and quick-release skewer wear out thedropout region of the lower leg (see Dropout photo below).
Inspect and measure the thickness of the dropouts every 6 months or 100 hours. Ensure thatany point on the surface is above the minimum specification of 6.20mm (see Measure Drop-out photo below).
Replace the lower leg assembly if the dropout thickness is at the minimum specification orsmaller.
Dropout
Measure Dropout
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 312/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Structural Inspection Page 311
Structural Inspection
Upper Tubes
Look for scratches and dings on the upper tubes, which will prematurely wear seals and bush-ings. Big scratches and/or dings could compromise the integrity of your fork. Contact an Au-thorized Service Center if any of the above are present on your FOX fork.
Crowns
Check both upper and lower crowns for any damage, deformation or cracks. Contact FOX Rac-ing Shox or an Authorized Service Center if any are present.
Lower Legs
Inspect the lower leg for any damage around the brace region, tube sections, disc brake
mounts and thru-axle dropouts. Check for cracks or flaking in the paint, which could be anindication of damage to the structure.
36 & 40 Dropout Inspection
With the axle in place, torque the pinch bolts to the proper setting (19 in-lb). There should bea gap present on the under side of the drops. If there is no gap and the walls are touching,this indicates the pinch bolts have been over-torqued. The material in this region may be com-promised as a result of the over-torqued pinch bolts. Contact a FOX Service Center if any of the above anomalies are present on your FOX fork.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 313/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Torque Values Page 312
Torque Values
air-sprung 32mm FORKS (FLOAT, F-SERIES, TALAS)
coil-sprung 32mm FORKS (vanilla)
part description torque value
in-lb N-cm
topcaps 165 1865
preload/rebound knob screws 11 124
topcap to damper shaft insert 75 847
rebound adjustment insert screw 3 33
rebound piston bolt 50 565
base valve bolt 75 847
base valve assembly to cartridgetube
55 621
cartridge tube to seal head 55 621
bottom nuts 50 565
brake posts 80 904
disc brake hose guide M3 screw 8 90
air tank valve 45 508
valve core 4 45
lockout force threshold knob 4 45
part description torque value
in-lb N-cm
topcaps 165 1865
preload/rebound knob screws 11 124
topcap to damper shaft insert 75 847
rebound adjustment insert screw 3 33
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 314/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Torque Values Page 313
36
rebound piston bolt 50 565
base valve bolt 75 847
base valve assembly to cartridgetube
55 621
cartridge tube to seal head 55 621
bottom nuts 50 565
brake posts 80 904
disc brake hose guide M3 screw 8 90
rebound knob 11 124
part description torque value
in-lb N-cm
topcaps 165 1865
bottom nuts 50 565
disc brake hose guide M3 screw 8 90
air tank valve (FLOAT & TALAS mod-els only)
45 508
valve core (FLOAT & TALAS models
only)
4 45
preload knob (VAN model only) 4 45
rebound knob 11 124
compression tuning knobs (RC2models only)
4 45
quick release axle pinch bolts 25 282
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 315/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Torque Values Page 314
40
part description torque value
in-lb N-cm
topcaps 165 1865
bottom nuts 50 565
disc brake hose guide M3 screw 8 90
rebound & preload knob 11 124
compression tuning knobs (RC2model only)
4 45
axle pinch bolts 19 215
crown-steerer pinch bolts 65 734
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 316/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Unit Conversion Page 315
Unit Conversion
To assist you converting units from imperial to metric, and vice-versa, FOX has provided afree conversion utility.
Convert is an easy-to-use unit conversion program that will convert most units of distance,temperature, volume, time, speed, mass, power, density, pressure, energy and many others,including the ability to create custom conversions.
You can access the ZIP file containing the README.TXT file and the CONVERT.EXE applicationhere.
CONVERT.EXE will run on the following supported operating systems:
Windows 95
Windows NT 4
Windows 98
Windows 98SE
Windows ME
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows 2003
Windows Vista
Note : Please read t he README.TXT f i le th a t i s inc luded w i t h t he CONVERT.ZI P
f i le . FOX Racing Shox assum es no respons ib i l i t y f o r any m iscalcu la t io n per -
f o r m e d b y t h e u s er t h r o u g h i n p u t e r r o r o r m a l f u n ct i o n o f t h e u t i l i t y s o f t w a r e .
The so f tw a r e i s p r ov ided as a cou r t esy on l y and i s d i st r i bu ted as f r eew ar e . As w i th any compu t a t i on , doub le - check using ano the r m e thod to ensu r e accu r a -
cy—m easu r e t w i ce, cu t once !
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 317/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Using the FOX High Pressure Pump Page 316
Using the FOX High Pressure Pump
FOX High Pressure Pump
ForksTo change the air pressure in your fork:
1. Remove the aircap (shown below) from the top of the right fork leg. It is much easier toremove the aircap on a TALAS fork by holding the lever with one hand and turning theaircap with the other.
2. Connect the pump by threading the chuck onto the Schrader valve until the pump gaugeregisters pressure. This takes about 6 turns. If the fork has no air pressure, the gauge willnot register. Do not over-tighten the chuck as it can damage the pump chuck seal.
3. Increase the pressure by stroking the pump a few times. Pressure should increase slowly.If the pressure increases rapidly, check that the pump is properly connected to the Schrad-er valve.
4. Decrease the pressure by depressing the black bleed valve. Push the bleed valve in half-way and hold to allow continuous pressure release. Depress the bleed valve completely torelease pressure incrementally (micro adjust).
5. Disconnect the pump by unthreading the chuck. The sound of air loss is from the pumphose, not the fork.
6. Install the aircap, and go ride.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 318/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Using the FOX High Pressure Pump Page 317
Rear ShocksTo change the air pressure in your shock:
1. Remove the Schrader air valve cap from the shock.
2. Thread the pump’s valve chuck onto the shock’s air valve until pressure registers on the
pump gauge. This takes approximately 6 turns. Do not over-tighten the pump on the airvalve as this will damage the pump chuck seal.
3. Stroke the pump a few cycles. The pressure should increase slowly. If pressure increasesrapidly check to make sure the pump is properly fitted and tightened onto the air valve. If the shock has no air pressure, the gauge will read zero.
4. Pump to the desired pressure setting. Air pressure range is from 50 to 300 PSI for the mainair chamber on air shocks. DO NOT EXCEED 300 PSI IN THE MAIN AIR CHAMBER.
5. You can decrease pressure by pushing the black bleed valve. Pushing the bleed valve half way down and holding it there will allow pressure to escape from the pump and shock.Pushing the bleed valve all the way down and releasing it will allow only a small amountof pressure to escape (micro adjust). When unthreading the pump from the air valve fit-ting, the sound of the air loss is from the pump hose, not from the shock. When you attach
the pump to the shock, the hose will need to fill with air. This may result in a pressurereading that can be lower by as much as 10 to 20 PSI.
6. Replace the Schrader air valve cap.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 319/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Warranty Information Page 318
Warranty Information
Warranty Policy
The factory warranty period for your fork/ shock is one year (two years for countriesin the EU1) from the original date of purchase of the bicycle or fork/ shock. A copy of the original purchase receipt must accompany any fork/ shock being considered forwarranty service. Warranty is at the full di scretion of FOX Racing Shox and w ill coveronly defective materials and workmanship. Warranty duration and laws may varyfrom state to state and/ or country to country.
Additionally, the seals on your fork are covered 90 days from the date of purchase. After the90 day period, they are considered wear-and-tear items and will not be covered under war-ranty.
Parts, components and assemblies subject to normal wear and tear are not covered under thiswarranty.
FOX Racing Shox reserves the right to all final warranty or non-warranty decisions.
Disclaimer
FOX Racing Shox is not responsible for any damages to you or others arising from riding,transporting, or other use of your fork/shock or bicycle. In the event that your fork/shockbreaks or malfunctions, FOX Racing Shox shall have no liability beyond the repair or replace-ment of your fork/shock pursuant to the terms outlined in the warranty policy below.
FLOAT Rear Shock Warranty Provisions
To maintain high performance, product longevity, and preserve warranty rights, periodic enduser maintenance is required. For more information, see “Service Intervals” on page 303.
DHX & DHX Air Warranty Provisions
DHX & DHX Air shocks require a minimum of 125 PSI in the Boost Valve (reservoir) to functionproperly. If the shock is cycled or ridden with less than 125 PSI in the Boost Valve, emulsifi-cation will occur and warranty service will not be provided by FOX Racing Shox.
Specific Exclusions from Warranty
• Parts replaced due to normal wear and tear, routine maintenance, or both
• Parts subject to normal wear and tear, routine maintenance, or both
•
Bushings
• Suspensions fluids
1. Austr ia, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Ger-many, Greece, Hungary, Irish Republic, I taly, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxemborg, Malta,Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, United Kingdom
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 320/322
Fox Racing Shox 2009 Owners Manual Warranty Information Page 319
General Exclusions from Warranty
• Installation of non-genuine FOX Racing Shox parts and/or accessories
• Abnormal strain, neglect, abuse and/or misuse
• Accident or collision damage
• Modification of original parts
• Lack of proper maintenance
• Shipping damages or loss (purchase of full value shipping insurance is recommended)
• Damage to interior or exterior caused by improper cable routing, rocks, crashes orimproper installation
• Oil changes or service not performed by FOX Racing Shox or an Authorized ServiceCenter
• Rear Shock only: Coil bind caused by excessive spring preload (2 turns max), unlessotherwise specified.
Warranty Submittal Process
• FOX RACING SHOX offers 48-hour turnaround, which may vary.
• Obtain an RA (Return Authorization) number and shipping address from FOX RacingShox at 1.800.FOX.SHOX. Outside the USA, contact the appropriate Authorized Serv-ice Center.
• Mark the RA number and Return Address clearly on the outside of the package andsend to FOX Racing Shox or your Authorized Service Center with shipping chargespre-paid by the sender.
• Proof-of-purchase is required for warranty consideration.
• Include a description of the problem, bicycle information (manufacturer, year andmodel), type of FOX product, spring rate and return address with daytime phonenumber.
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 321/322
8/7/2019 FOX shox 2009EnglishOM
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fox-shox-2009englishom 322/322